Discontinuities and voids in the coatings (except zinc primer and galvanizing) will be determined with an electrical holiday detector, spark type, or other means recommended by the manufacturer for coating type and thickness.
3.11 CLEANING UP
A. General:
1. During progress of the Work, do not allow the accumulation of empty containers or other excess items except in areas specifically set aside for that purpose.
2. Prevent accidental spilling of paint materials and, in event of such spill, immediately remove all spilled material and the waste or other equipment used to clean up the spill, and wash the surfaces to their original undamaged condition, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. All cloths and cotton waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day.
B. Prior to final inspection:
1. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, visually inspect all surfaces and remove all paint and traces of paint from surfaces not scheduled to be painted.
3.12 PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Below is a list of the various paint systems included in this Section. The systems are categorized according to exposure or surface. Some systems include alternative types of coatings which will perform satisfactorily for the particular exposure.
B. Provide coatings in accordance with the following exposure schedule:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COATINGS 09 90 00-14
Exposure
Surface Preparation
Paint
System
Note
(see below)
Prefinished machinery
coating
Hand Tool Cleaning 5 3
Exposed galvanized
steel, copper and other
non-ferrous metals
Solvent clean, lightly
Hand Sand
6 4
Factory finish coated
items not requiring
field painting
Touchup - 5
C. Notes to Application Schedule:
1. These surfaces include, but are not limited to: general miscellaneous ferrous metal; machinery; pumps; blowers; compressors; supports; valve handwheels and stands; valve bodies; above ground piping systems; pipes; valves and fittings in vaults; structural steel; steel elements; except where other systems in this schedule are more specifically applicable.
2. Apply this system to both ferrous metal and galvanized metal submerged in or suspended over water. These surfaces include but are not limited to machinery parts, piping, valves, brackets and supports, and miscellaneous supports, braces and pump columns. Do not blast clean galvanized surfaces; instead provide one prime coat of 40 passivator prior to finish painting. Coat inaccessible surfaces prior to erection.
3. All piping, valves, pumps, drives, machinery, and equipment that have factory finish coats that will be exposed to atmosphere. This system provides for repair of above named items and color uniformity with rest of field coat items.
4. Exposed galvanized steel items except those specifically excluded, exposed copper pipe and other non-ferrous metal items.
5. All panels and equipment with factory finishes identified elsewhere as not requiring field paint, damaged during shipping, storage, or installation:
touch-up in the field in a manner compatible with the factory coating with respect to paint type, color, and texture. Touch -up fusion epoxy -coated items only with material provided by the fusion epoxy fabricator. If more than 5% of the surface requires touchup, return the items to the fabricator for recoating.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1
26 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, transportation and perform operations necessary or incidental to the proper execution and completion of the electrical work, whether specifically mentioned or not, and as directly indicated or reasonably implied by the Drawings and Specifications.
1.2 WORK SPECIFIED IN THESE DIVISIONS:
A. Section 26 05 19: Low Voltage Conductors and Cables
B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
C. Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems
E. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices
1.3 WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER DIVISIONS:
A. Section 40 61 00: Instrumentation
B. Section 40 63 43: Programmable Logic Process Controllers
1.4 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. In any case, cooperate with the other trades who may or may not be party to this Contract for the purpose of coordinating the electrical requirements and installation of equipment, materials, and furnishings provided by those other trades, including the Owner.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Provide equipment and materials which conform to, and perform the installation thereof in accordance with the following codes and industry standards. The applicable version of each shall be that in effect as of the date of the Contract:
1. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70).
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. Florida State Fire Marshal (FSFM).
4. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2
5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
6. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
7. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
8. Electrical Safety Orders.
9. Other applicable local codes and ordinances.
B. Where the authority-having-jurisdiction makes an interpretation or decision, as is their prerogative in accordance with the Code, such direction shall be considered a part of these Contract Documents as if contained herein. With respect to completing the intent of the Contract Documents, comply with any and all requirements of the authority -having-jurisdiction and utility company field inspectors, at no additional cost.
C. The above referenced codes and standards are considered to be absolute minimum requirements. The Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence over the above referenced codes and standards where materials or workmanship of higher quality or larger size is indicated. Nothing in these Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to allow work not conforming to the applicable codes and standards.
1.6 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Examine all relevant Contract Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and Shop Drawings in order to become acquainted with the Work of other installers whose activities will adjoin or be affected by the Electrical Work.
1.7 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND FEES
A. Procure and pay for all permits, licenses and fees that are required to carry out and complete the Electrical Work.
B. Pay for building department or utility company imposed inspection fees.
C. Pay utility company charges for normal or after hours shutdowns, service calls, repairs, and cable locating that are directly related to the installation of the Electrical Work.
1.8 SITE VERIFICATION OF INFORMATION
A. Visit the project site prior to submitting a bid and verify the condition, location and dimensions of buildings, equipment, and facilities. Become acquainted with conditions under which the Work is to be performed and which may affect the cost thereof.
B. Verify at the project site, the accuracy of information shown on the Drawings regarding existing equipment, materials, and facilities. This includes but is not limited to: size, type, rating, quality, age, and serviceability. No allowance will be Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3
made on behalf of the Contractor for extra expenses resulting from the failure to discover conditions affecting the Work.
1.9 WORKING SPACE
A. Maintain adequate work space around, and access to, electrical and mechanical equipment in strict accordance with the applicable Codes. Verify during the course of construction that sufficient space will be available for the installation equipment, fixtures, etc.
1.10 MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Materials shall be new, high quality, free from defects, of standard make, and of the brand or grade as shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Specific trade names are used in the Drawings and Specifications in order to establish the standard grade and characteristics of said items. This does not imply the right upon the part of the Contractor to use other materials or methods without the approval of the Owner.
B. Electrical materials and equipment shall bear the label of, or be listed by, the Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) wherever standards have been established and label service is regularly furnished by that agency. Comply with the installation and application requirements of UL as documented in their published directories.
C. Unless specifically noted, equipment and systems shall be the product of a manufacturer who has been in the manufacture of, and has nationally distributed catalogs covering the ratings and specifications of, said equipment or systems, for a period of not less than five (5) years.
D. Maintain uniformity throughout the Project by making use of only one make or brand of material for each material used.
E. Substitutions of materials or methods will only be allowed if such items are approved in writing by the Owner as equal in quality and utility to the specified items. Submit a list of proposed substitutions within thirty (30) days of the award of the Contract. Include on the list the original manufacturer’s name and model number, the proposed manufacturer’s name and model number, catalog cut sheets, ratings, sizes, performance curves, shop drawings, and other data as may be required to demonstrate equality to the specified item.
F. The approval of a substitution does not authorize any deviation from the utility, size, function, or durability of the specified item unless specifically pointed out and requested in the proposed substitution list, and said deviation is approved in writing by the Owner. Responsibility of the Contractor for dimensional considerations or space conflicts is not relieved by the approval of a substitution.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4
G. If requested by the Owner, submit samples of materials and equipment for approval prior to installation.
1.11 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
A. See the Design-Assist Agreement for conditions of submittal approval and general requirements for submission of shop drawings.
B. Submit a minimum of five copies (or more as required by the Design -Assist Agreement) of electrical shop drawings and manufacturer's cut sheets for equipment and materials as noted in each Division 26 specification section. Bind the submittals as complete volumes according to classification of equipment such as power, lighting, fire alarm, etc. When possible, make all electrical submittals at the same time.
C. Submit shop drawings and supporting data as instruments of the Contractor.
Stamp each item in the submittal documents with the Contractor’s stamp, thereby stating that the equipment meets all requirements and conditions of the Drawings and Specifications. In particular, certify that the items shown on the shop drawings conform to the dimensional, environmental, and space restrictions as pertains to all work under this Contract and the work of other parties in conjunction with this Project.
D. Provide a blank space on the title page of each submittal classification for the Owner’s or Engineer’s approval stamp and comment field. The minimum size of such space shall be eight inches wide by five inches high.
1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The data and information contained on the Drawings is as accurate as was reasonably possible at the time they were produced, but absolute accuracy is not guaranteed. Exact locations, distances, elevations, etc., will be dictated by the actual building and the conditions at the site.
B. The layout of electrical equipment, wiring, and accessories is shown in a diagrammatic fashion (not pictorially) in order to achieve clarity and legibility.
Although the size and location of electrical equipment is drawn to scale wherever possible, refer to all data in the Contract Documents and field verify this information as the project progresses. Examine architectural, structural, mechanical, and other drawings to determine the exact location of conduits, outlets, fixtures, and equipment and to note any conditions which may affect the electrical work.
C. The Drawings and Specifications may be superseded by later detail drawings and specifications prepared by the Owner. Conform to such detail drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders, other reasonable changes as if they are Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 5
contained herein. See the Design-Assist Agreement for change order cost considerations.
D. Because the Electrical Drawings may be distorted for clarity of representation, it may be necessary to field verify the exact location of electrical outlets, lights, switches, etc. in order to conform to the architectural elements. The Owner reserves the right to make minor changes to the locations of equipment, devices, and wiring shown on the Drawings, at no additional cost, providing the changes are ordered before the rough -in of conduit, boxes, or related items is completed, and no extra material are required.
E. Determine the appropriate location of lighting fixtures, outlets, wall -mounted devices, etc. by studying the reflected ceiling plans, sections, layout plans and interior elevations. Report conflicting conditions to the Owner before commencing construction.
F. Conduit quantities, sizes, termination points, and wiring are depicted on the Electrical Drawings. However, not all conduit bends or routing details are necessarily shown. Route conduit so as to conform to the structural conditions, avoid obstructing other trades, maintain space restrictions and keep circulation areas and access openings clear.
G. Thoroughly examine the Contract Documents prior to submitting a bid in order to determine electrical requirements which are not necessarily indicated on the Electrical Drawings. Include sufficient allowance in the bid sum to cover the costs of these other requirements.
H. Should the Contractor perceive that the Drawings and Specifications do not sufficiently define the intent of electrical work, contact the Engineer for clarification or additional information. The absence of such contact will be considered as evidence of understanding, on the part of the Contractor, of the intended Electrical Work and the required installation thereof.
1.13 WORKMANSHIP
A. Constantly supervise the work personally or through an authorized and competent representative. Keep the same foreman or supervisor on the project from commencement through completion.
B. Perform the Electrical work using the highest caliber craftsman available.
Workmanship shall be first class and of the best quality available to insure a long and trouble free service life. Allow only experienced and competent workmen on the job.
1.14 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 6
A. Consult with the other installers and trades in coordinating the Work so as to avoid conflicts, omissions and delays. Cooperate with other contractors, third parties, and the Owner in order to expedite the project and provide for the proper execution of the building as a whole. Work performed without regard to other trades or the overall project scheme, may necessarily be required to be moved at the Contractor’s expense.
1.15 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTIONS
A. Adhere to the manufacturer’s directions regarding the proper installation and configuration of electrical equipment where those directions cover points not included in these Drawings and Specifications.
1.16 PROTECTION AND STORAGE
A. Deliver electrical materials to the site new, and in unbroken packages. Provide for the temporary storage of such materials, equipment, and construction tools in accordance with the Design -Assist Agreement. Protect electrical equipment and materials during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
B. During shipping storage and handling protect electrical materials from damage of any type including dust, water, over -spray, and temperature. Avoid damage during construction to the work and materials of other trades as well as the electrical work and material. Repair or replace, at the Contractor’s expense, defective or damaged items such that the entire Work is completed in a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
1.17 EXCAVATION, CUTTING, PATCHING, AND REPAIR
A. Perform excavation and backfill required for the installation of electrical sub - structures. Restore grounds, walkways, roadways, curbs, walls, and other existing underground facilities to their original condition.
B. Cut, core -drill, and demolish existing walls, floors, ceilings and other building surfaces as required for the installation of Electrical Work. Obtain the approval of the Owner prior to performing any operation which may affect any structural elements of the building.
C. Patch and repair wood, plaster, tile, or concrete surfaces which have been damaged by the installation of the Electrical Work so that the finished surface matches the surrounding conditions.
1.18 FLASHING, WATERPROOFING AND SEALING
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 7
A. In general, install in an approved watertight manner, Electrical Work which pierces exterior walls or waterproofing membranes. Flash and counter -flash roof and wall penetrations in a manner described in other applicable sections of this Specification and as approved by the Owner.
B. Fit conduits passing through finished walls with steel escutcheon plates of brass, chrome, or painted finish as directed by the Owner. Grout penetrations of floor slabs, concrete or masonry walls with an approved grout or silicone elastomeric caulk.
1.19 CLEANING, ADJUSTING, AND TOUCH-UP
A. Remove on a daily basis electrical debris, scraps, packaging material and other rubbish. Dispose of such items off -site in an approved manner and debris.
Maintain the site free from physical hazards at all times in accordance with OSHA regulations. See the Design-Assist Agreement for additional requirements.
B. After installation, completely clean electrical equipment, fixtures, and materials of excess paint, over -spray, plaster, cement, insulating products, and other foreign matter. Leave the Electrical Work in a clean, finished, dry, level, like new condition.
C. Touch-up paint scratches and scuffs on electrical equipment and lighting fixtures with paint recommended by the manufacturer and matching the original item finish.
D. Make setting, adjustments, and programming in accordance with the manufactures’ operating and installation instructions. Settings and program variables will be issued by the Owner prior to commissioning of the electrical system.
1.20 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Throughout the project, maintain accurate and current record documents. Show on the record drawings deviations from the Electrical Drawings, locations of underground conduits and pull -boxes, and concealed equipment which is not readily apparent. Dimension the record drawings using permanent, readily identified benchmarks such as column or wall lines.
B. At the completion of the project, present one clearly legible set of the record drawings to the Owner.
1.21 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING
A. Arrange for the inspection of the Work at various stages of completion by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, utility company representatives, and the Owner.
Comply with all directions and remedial measures issued thereby. Any objections Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 8
to these orders on the part of the Contractor must be presented to the Owner in writing within forty eight (48) hours of the inspection report.
B. Coordinate the installation of the Work so that observation of all rough -in, concealed, or underground Work can take place by the Owner. Provide a minimum of seventy two (72) hours notice to the Owner prior to covering up the work. Uncover Work that has not been properly observed and make repairs to restore the Work and adjoining surfaces to their proper condition at no additional cost.
C. Perform tests of the electrical system during the course of the project and at project completion to ensure safe and proper function in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturers’ recommendations, and applicable codes.
Provide complete documentation of all test results to the Owner prior to project completion. Testing shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1. Test for short circuits, open circuits, neutral leakage, and improper grounds on feeders and branch circuits. Perform this test with mains in disconnect from feeders, branch circuits closed, fixtures and devices permanently connected, lamps removed from sockets and wall switches closed.
2. Provide insulation resistance tests of all phase and neutral circuit conductors using a 500 Volt Megger for circuits of 240 Volt rating and below, and a 1000 Volt Megger for circuits of 277 volts and above.
Minimum acceptable insulation resistance is one (1) megohm.
3. Perform a ground resistance test of each main grounding electrode system, ground rod, and supplemental grounding electrode. Utilize a calibrated, direct reading, earth ground test set and make the tests using the “Three- terminal, Fall-of-Potential” method. The maximum allowable earth ground resistance is 25 ohms.
4. Test for proper phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral operating voltage on the main service and on each separately derived system. Perform this test at full load and at no load. With all circuits at full operating conditions, test the phase and neutral load currents using a clamp-on ammeter.
5. Tests as required by other sections of these Specifications.
6. Tests as prescribed by individual equipment manufacturers whether or not described in these Specifications.
D. At project completion, demonstrate to the Owner that the entire installation is complete, in proper operation condition and that the Contract has been properly and fully executed. Activate all circuits, lights, devices, and controls under full load and normal operating conditions. Identify faulty items and immediately replace or repair defective equipment, workmanship, and materials to like new condition and retest in the presence of the Owner.
E. At the completion of the Project, demonstrate to the Owner that the entire electrical system is free from short circuits and improper grounds, or upon request of the Owner anytime, make necessary tests under the observation of the Owner Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 9
which will ensure that electrical equipment, materials and installation methods are as specified.
1.22 GUARANTEE
A. In accordance with Design-Assist Agreement requirements.
1.23 WARRANTIES, CERTIFICATES, AND OPERATING MANUALS
A. Properly fill out and deliver to the Owner, all warranties, guarantees, certificates, etc. for equipment and materials that are furnished and installed under this Section of the Work. The effective date on each item shall be the date of acceptance of the work by the Owner.
B. Deliver to the Owner, a minimum of two (2) copies of the manufacturers’ operating and maintenance manuals for major items of equipment.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Wire and cable, This section covers all labor, material, tools, equipment and services required to install power conductors, control cables, wiring connectors and connections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 05 00: Common Work Results for Electrical B. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems C. Section 26 05 33: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems D. Section 26 05 53: Identification for Electrical Systems
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. ASTM B 3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
B. ASTM B 496 Compact Round Concentric -Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors
C. ASTM B 8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or
D. Soft
E. ANSI C 2 National Electrical Safety Code – latest edition F. IEEE 242 Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and
G. Commercial Power Systems.
H. IEEE 399 Recommend Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System
I. Analysis.
J. NECA Standard of Installation.
K. NEMA WC-26 Wire and Cable Packaging
L. NETA ATS National Electrical Testing Association Acceptance Testing M. Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
N. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code – latest edition.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
O. UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.
P. UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.
Q. UL 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tapes.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The applications for cable, wire and connectors required, but not limited to, are as follows:
1. Power distribution circuitry.
2. Lighting circuitry.
3. Appliance and equipment circuitry.
4. Wiring for motors of mechanical equipment
5. Wiring from the motor(s) of mechanical equipment to the disconnect switches or junction boxes, including wiring for pushbuttons, pilot lights, interlocks and similar devices as directed, shown, or specified.
6. Wiring from the motors of mechanical equipment to motor starters, including other auxiliary wiring as may be required, directed, or shown.
7. Line voltage wiring as required by other Divisions 2 thru 15, and interlocking to motor starters.
8. Control wiring for motors, mechanical equipment, relays and switches, and similar mechanical-electrical devices.
9. Line voltage wiring to thermostats, alarm systems and other miscellaneous equipment.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. All conductor sizes are based on copper.
B. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is diagrammatic unless dimensioned.
C. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all raceways and raceway/cable supports in accordance with all other sections of these specifications.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Electrical Testing Laboratories, Inc. (ETL), or other recognized, acceptable testing and listing agencies as suitable for the purpose specified and shown.
1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical data for building wire and cables.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
2. Field Test Report:
3. Measure overall insulation resistance to ground. Provide certified test report for Engineer’s Review.
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Provide project record documents showing actual locations of components and circuits.
B. Submit final certified test reports of all insulation resistance tests.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer shall be a Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum of five (5) years experience.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products on site in accordance with Division 1 requirements.
B. Accept cable and accessories on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Store and protect cable and accessories from the environment in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions. Provide adequate heating and ventilation to prevent condensation.
D. Damaged items shall be replaces at no additional cost to COUNTY.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required.
B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and cable lengths within 10 feet of length shown.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
A. Building wire and cable shall be UL83 compliant, insulated, single conductor, copper, solid or stranded, rated for 600 -volts AC. The insulation shall be thermoplastic material rated for 90 degrees Celsius dry locations, 75 or 90 degrees Celsius wet locations, THW, THHN/THWN, THHN/THWN -2, RHW or XHHW, per ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. For Interior Dry Location: Use only building wire, THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2 insulation rated 90 degree Celsius, in raceway.
C. For Exterior Wet or Dry Locations: Use only XHHW insulation rated for 90 degree Celsius, in raceway.
D. For Underground Dry or Wet Locations: Use only XHHW insulation rated 90 degree Celsius, in raceway.
E. For connections to electrical equipment, coordinate wire type with equipment manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer: Aetna, General Cable, Okonite Company, Southwire
2.2 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. Single Pair (600 Volt No.16 AWG Twisted, shielded pair instrumentation Cable, Type TC):
1. General: Single pair instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log application. Suitable for installation in cable tray, conduit, data approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90°C dry locations, 75°C wet locations
2. Individual Conductors: Soft annealed copper, Class B, 7 -strand concentric per ASTM B8, 22 AWG, 7-strand copper tinned drain wire.
3. Insulation and Jacket: Each conductor PVC / Nylon insulation. Pair conductors pigmented black and white. Jacket flame -retardant and sunlight and oil resistant PVC with 45 mils nominal thickness. Shield aluminum/Polyester overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
4. Dimension: 0.345 inch nominal OD.
5. Manufacturer: Alpha Wire Corporation, Belden, General Cable, the Okonite Company, Lake Cable
B. Single Triad (600 Volt No.16 Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable, Type TC):
1. General: Single triad instrumentation cable designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log application. Suitable for installation Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5
in cable tray, conduit or other approved raceways. Minimum cable temperature rating shall be 90°C dry locations, 75°C wet locations.
2. Conductors: Soft annealed copper, Class B, 7-strand concentric per ASTM B8, 22 AWG, 7-strand copper tinned drain wire.
3. Insulation and Jacket: Each conductor, PVC/Nylon insulation. Triad conductors pigmented black, red, and white. Jacket flame -retardant and sunlight and oil retardant PVC with 45 mils nominal thickness. Shield aluminum/Polyester, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage
4. Dimensions: 0.360-inch nominal OD5.
5. Manufacturers: Aplpha Wire Corporation, Belden, General Cable, the Okonite Company, Lake Cable
C. Multi-conductors, Multi -pairs, or Multi -triads not acceptable, unless used for cable tray application. Cable runs that are partially or totally run in cable tray shall be of multi-conductor type for wire sizes that are required in the NEC.
2.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:
A. Provide stranded copper conductors, as indicated or as required by NEC, for equipment grounding. All grounding conductor shall be stranded copper.
B. Provide conductors with green Type THHN insulation with minimum thickness of 1/32-inch.
2.4 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Split Bolt Connectors:
FCI Burndy Corp.
Cooper Crouse Hinds.
O.Z./Gedney Co.
Thomas & Betts Co.
3-M Co.
B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:
FCI Burndy Corp.
Ideal Industries Co.
Thomas & Betts Co.
3-M Co.
C. Spring Wire Connectors:
Ideal Industries Co.
3-M Co.
D. Compression Connectors:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 6
FCI Burndy Corp.
Thomas & Betts Co.
3-M Co.
2.5 WIRE COLOR CODE
A. Color-code all conductors:
1. Wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller shall have integral color -coded insulation.
2. Wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger may have black insulation but shall be identified by color -coded electrical tape at all junction, splice, pull, or termination points.
3. Color tape shall be applied to at least 3 inches of the conductor at the termination ends and in junction or pull boxes or where readily accessible.
4. Conductors for all systems shall not change color at splice points.
5. Where there are two or more neutrals in one conduit, each shall be individually identified with the proper circuit.
6. For No. 4 AWG and larger ground conductors, identify with green tape at both ends and all visible points, included in all junction boxes.
B. Each phase wire shall be uniquely color-coded as indicated below for the City of Roseville panel:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 7
C. Each phase wire shall be uniquely color-coded as indicated below for the PCWA panel and equipment:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported as required by the specifications.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 8
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Test raceway with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove foreign material before pulling cables.
B. For conduits sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel.
C. For conduits sizes 3 inches and larger, draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit. Then draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install wire and cable in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA “Standard of Installation”.
2. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
3. Identify and color code wire and cable. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
4. Protect exposed cable from damage.
5. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
6. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No. 4 AWG and larger. Lubricant shall not be deleterious to the cable sheath, jacket or outer covering.
7. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tension limits when installing wire or cable.
8. Support cables above accessible ceiling using standard support methods to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
9. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards
B. Cable and Wire Size:
1. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless specifically indicated as aluminum or “AL”.
2. Use conductor no smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
3. Use conductor no smaller than No. 14 AWG for control circuits.
4. Use No. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
5. Use No. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.
6. Use stranded conductor for all feeders, branch and control circuits.
C. Cable Identification
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 9
1. Identify all wires and cables as specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
D. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections:
1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Where an anti-oxidation lubricant is used, apply liberally, coating all exposed conductor surfaces.
2. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
3. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.
4. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, No. 8 AWG and larger.
5. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, No. 8 AWG and smaller.
6. Tape un -insulated conductors and connector with two layers of half - lapped rubber insulating compound tape and two layers of half -lapped, 7- mil electrical tape, Scotch 33+, or equal.
7. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, No. 10 AWG and smaller.
8. Stranded conductors for control circuits shall have fork or ring terminals crimped on for all device terminations. Bare stranded conductors shall not be placed directly under the screws.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and test shall be performed under provisions of NETA ATS section 7.3 (2) - Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt Maximum as follows.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
1. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications.
2. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct connection in accordance with single-line diagram.
3. Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods:
4. Use of low-resistance ohm-meter in accordance with NETA section
7.3.2.2 (Electrical Tests).
5. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer's published data from NETA ATS Table 10.12.
6. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.
7. Verify cable color coding with applicable specifications and National Electrical Code.
Electrical Tests:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 LOW VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 10
1. Perform insulation -resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute.
2. Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with Section 7.3.2.1 (Visual and Mechanical Inspection).
3. Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection.
4. Correct malfunctions and/or deficiencies immediately as detected at no additional cost to the District, including additional verification testing.
5. Subsequent to final wire and cable terminations, energize all circuitry and demonstrate functional adequacy in accordance with system requirements.
Test Values:
1. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.
2. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS Table 10.12 unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer.
3. Micro-ohm or milli-volt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data. If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
4. Minimum insulation -resistance values should not be less than 50 meg - ohms.
5. Investigate deviations between adjacent phases.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-1
26 05 22
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Grounding and bonding for electrical systems.
B. Section includes: Grounding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:
1. Underground distribution grounding.
2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as -built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:
1. Test wells.
2. Ground rods.
3. Ground rings.
4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in "Operation Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-2
and Maintenance Data," include instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells and ground rings based on NFPA 70B
1. Tests shall determine if ground -resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.
2. Include recommended testing intervals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned -copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1 -5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
C. Bare Grounding Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.
2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding; if wood, use pressure-treated fir, cypress, or cedar.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-3
D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32 -inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1 -1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand -off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.
D. Bus-bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic - type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper -clad, round type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) in diameter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
B. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.
C. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0AWG minimum.
1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.
2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when indicated as part of duct-bank installation.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-4
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
E. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
5. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
6. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.
C. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode.
Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
1. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 Section "Boxes and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
2. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance.
Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-5
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
2. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect - type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided -type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
E. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column extending around the perimeter of building
1. Install tinned -copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.
F. Ufer Ground (Concrete -Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a minimum of 20 feet (6m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No.4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet (6 m) long, coil excess conductor within base of foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
G. Labeling
1. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.
2. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and at the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.
a. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason, notify the facility manager."
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-6
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
D. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.
4. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
5. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
6. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations.
Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 25 ohms.
H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-7
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 22-8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-1 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Design -Assist Agreement, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.
C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.
D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Steel slotted support systems.
2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-2 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:
1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.
2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.
4. Equipment supports.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation.
d. GS Metals Corp.
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
g. Wesanco, Inc.
h. Or approved equal.
i. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-3 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.
3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4.
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
5. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable -iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non - armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Hilti Inc.
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
5) Or approved equal.
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge-type, or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
3) Hilti Inc.
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-4 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6) Or approved equal
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two -bolt conduit clamps
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-5 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface -Mounted Equipment and Components:
Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle -type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units.
4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder -actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard - weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts
6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces:
Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted -channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic -restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.
B. Use 3000 -psi (20.7 -MPa) , 28 -day compressive -strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete"
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
26 05 29-6 April 2024 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor -bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 PAINTING
A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC -PA 1 requirements for touching up field - painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of
2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-1
26 05 33
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Design-Assist Agreement, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5. Surface raceways.
6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged- cover enclosures, and cabinets.
1. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
4. Electri-Flex Company.
5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
6. Picoma Industries, a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc.
7. Republic Conduit.
8. Robroy Industries.
9. Southwire Company.
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.
12. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.
E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch (1 mm), minimum.
F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.
G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.
2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of
0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.
I. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-3
use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. Electri-Flex Company.
8. Kraloy.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.
11. RACO; a Hubbell company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.
D. RNC: Type EPC -40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-4
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less, respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small - Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Adalet.
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc.
6. Hoffman; a Pentair company.
7. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division.
8. Kraloy.
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.
10. Mono-Systems, Inc.
11. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group.
12. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
13. Robroy Industries.
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.
15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures; a division of Robroy Industries.
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
17. Wiremold/Legrand.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.
F. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-5
G. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg).
1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
H. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
I. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.
J. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
K. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2 -1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep)
L. Gangable boxes: are prohibited.
M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Fiberglass.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Oldcastle or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. CDR Systems Corporation; Hubbell Power Systems.
d. NewBasis.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-6
e. Synertech Moulded Products; a division of Oldcastle Precast, Inc.
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
4. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper -resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."
7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long (300 mm Wide by 600 mm Long) and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks and pulling -in irons installed before concrete is poured.
9. Source quality control for underground enclosures.
C. Handhole and Pull -Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: PVC-CoatedGRC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC -40-PVC, concrete encased under trafficable areas.
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment):
LFMC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: GRC.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-7
2. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: RNC, Type EPC - 40-PVC.
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment):
FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: PVC-Coated GRC.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit.
Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.
H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.
B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-8
D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90 -degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.
F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
G. A. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.
H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1 -inch (27 -mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum10-foot (3-m) intervals.
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.
5. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Coat field -cut threads on PVC -coated raceway with a corrosion -preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.
J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.
K. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1 -1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1 -1/2-inch (41 -mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.
L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts.
Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
M. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures.
Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-9
N. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2 -inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.
O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200 -lb (90 -kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.
P. Retain "Surface Raceways" Paragraph below if applicable.
1. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments.
Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
R. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
S. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least
0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-10
least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F (0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion -joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
T. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
U. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated.
V. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.
W. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.
X. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
Y. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
Z. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.
AA. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
BB. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-11
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit.
Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie -in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earthwork."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub -ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches (75 mm) of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of the coupling. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches (1500 mm) from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above direct-buried conduits but a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) below grade. Align planks along centerline of conduit.
7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2 -inch (12.5 -mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75 -mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade.
Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch (25 mm) above finished grade.
D. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-12
and as indicated. Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.
E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut.
Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL
PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-1
26 05 43
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ducts in concrete-encased duct banks.
2. Hand-holes and hand-hole accessories.
3. Manholes and manhole accessories.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems for grounding electrodes and testing of grounds.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manhole and hand hole hardware.
2. Conduit and ducts, including elbows, bell ends, bends, fittings, and solvent cement.
3. Duct-bank materials, including spacers and miscellaneous components.
4. Warning tape.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for underground ducts and utility structures and include the following:
1. For precast manholes and hand holes, Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, and shall show the following:
a. Construction of individual segments.
b. Joint details.
c. Design calculations.
C. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in underground precast manholes, according to ASTM C 858.
D. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of manholes with ASTM C 857 and ASTM C 858, based on factory inspection.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store precast concrete units at Project site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible.
B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-2
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, and handholes with final arrangement of other utilities and site grading, as determined in the field.
B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes and handholes with final profiles of conduits as determined by coordination with other utilities and underground obstructions. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure duct runs drain to manholes and handholes, and as approved by the Owner’s Representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures:
a. Carder Concrete Products.
b. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.
c. Elmhurst-Chicago Stone Co.
d. Jensen Precast.
e. Utility Vault Co.
f. Wausau Concrete Co.
g. Or equal.
2. Frames and Covers:
a. Alhambra Foundry
b. Campbell Foundry Co.
c. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
d. McKinley Iron Works, Inc.
e. Neenah Foundry Co.
f. Or equal.
3. Nonmetallic Ducts and Accessories:
a. Arnco Corp.
b. Beck Manufacturing Inc.
c. Cantex, Inc.
d. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
e. ElecSys, Inc.
f. Electri-Flex Co.
g. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
h. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
i. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
j. Or equal.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-3
2.2 CONDUIT
A. Conduit and fittings are specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
2.3 DUCTS
A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.
2.4 HAND HOLES
A. Precast Handholes: Reinforced concrete, with steel frame and access door assembly as the top of hand hole. Pulling-in irons and other built-in items shall be installed before pouring concrete. Cover shall have nonskid finish and legend.
Unit, when buried, shall be designed to support AASHTO H10 loading for sidewalk and landscaped areas and HS20 for roadways, parking lots and loading docks.
B. Cover Legend:
1. “HIGH VOLTAGE”
2. "ELECTRIC"
3. “COMMUNICATION”
4. “FIRE ALARM”
5. “CATV”
6. Other distinct systems as applicable.
2.5 PRECAST MANHOLES
A. Precast Units: ASTM 478, with interlocking mating sections, complete with accessories, hardware, and features as indicated. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrance and sleeve for ground rod.
B. Structural Design Loading: ASTM C 857, Class A-16 (AASHTO HS20).
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Spacers: Rigid PVC interlocking spacers.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers: Per manufacturer recommendation and engineer approval.
C. Grounding Materials: Comply with Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
D. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-4
2.7 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A. Seal manhole section joints with sealing compound recommended by the manhole manufacturer.
B. Concrete: Use 3000-psi- minimum, or Slurry
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Underground Ducts for Electrical Cables Higher than 600 V: Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete-encased duct bank.
B. Underground Ducts for Telephone Utility Service: Type EPC-40-PVC, direct- buried duct bank, except use Type EPC-80-PVC when crossing roads.
C. Underground Ducts for Communication Circuits: Type EPC-40-PVC, direct- buried duct bank, except use Type EPC-80-PVC when crossing roads.
3.2 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION
A. Exercise care in excavating, trenching, and working near existing utilities. Locate any existing buried utilities before excavating.
B. Duct banks shall be installed so that the top of the concrete encasement shall be no less than 30 inches below grade or pavement for primary 12K power.
C. Use solvent-cement joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane.
D. Concrete-Encased, Nonmetallic Ducts: Support ducts on duct spacers, spaced as recommended by manufacturer and coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor temperature. Install as follows:
1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts and secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting.
2. Reinforcement: Reinforce duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated.
E. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete- encased duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-5
F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.
G. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.
3.3 MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE INSTALLATION
A. Drainage: Install drains in bottom of units where indicated. Coordinate with drainage provisions indicated. Sumps shall be knocked out at time of installation.
B. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
C. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 inches for anchor bolts installed in the field. Use a minimum of two anchors for each cable stanchion.
D. Precast Concrete Manhole Installation: comply with ASTM C 891.
1. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures.
B. Grounding: Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
C. Duct Integrity: Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of the duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.
D. Correct installations if possible and retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective products and retest.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-6
B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Design-Assist Agreement, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identification for raceways.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-2
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
3. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-3
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion- resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:
1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
3. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical -resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.
D. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion- resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
E. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-4
F. Snap-Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self -adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.
B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color -coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color -Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid -colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
E. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, with corrosion- resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE
A. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-5
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: Electric Line, High Voltage.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: Telephone cable, CATV cable, communications cable, optical fiber cable.
C. Tag: Type I:
1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 4 mils (0.1 mm).
3. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9.0 kg/100 sq. m).
4. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf (133.4 N), and 2500 psi (17.2 MPa).
D. Tag: Type II:
1. Multilayer laminate consisting of high -density polyethylene scrim coated with pigmented polyolefin, bright -colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Thickness: 12 mils (0.3 mm).
3. Weight: 36.1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (17.6 kg/100 sq. m).
4. 3 -Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 400 lbf (1780 N), and 11,500 psi (79.2 MPa).
E. Tag: Type ID
1. Detectable three -layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright -colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Overall Thickness: 5 mils (0.125 mm).
3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
4. Weight: 28 lb/1000 sq. ft. (13.7 kg/100 sq. m).
5. 3 -Inch (75 -mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 70 lbf (311.3 N), and 4600 psi (31.7 MPa).
F. Tag: Type IID
1. Reinforced, detectable three -layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented woven scrim, a solid aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of the conductive core, bright- colored, [continuous -printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, ] compounded for direct-burial service.
2. Overall Thickness: 8 mils (0.2 mm).
3. Foil Core Thickness: 0.35 mil (0.00889 mm).
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-6
4. Weight: 34 lb/1000 sq. ft. (16.6 kg/100 sq. m).
5. 3-Inch (75-mm) Tensile According to ASTM D 882: 300 lbf (1334 N), and 12,500 psi (86.1 MPa).
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory -printed, multicolor, pressure -sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:
1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:
1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose -acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 -inch (1 -mm) galvanized -steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION -
AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT
CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face .
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-7
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark -gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm) .
2.10 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self- locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638:
12,000 psi (82.7 MPa).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638:
12,000 psi (82.7 MPa).
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).
4. Color: Black.
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self- locking.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-8
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C), According to ASTM D 638:
7000 psi (48.2 MPa).
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F (Minus 46 to plus 140 deg C).
5. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless -steel screws or stainless - steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self -adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color - coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 -foot (15 -m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.
G. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-9
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground -line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches (400 mm) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self - adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 30 -foot (10 -m) maximum intervals.
B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color -coding conductor tape to identify the phase.
1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less:
Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch -circuit conductors.
2. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.
3. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black.
b. Phase B: Red.
c. Phase C: Blue.
4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Orange.
c. Phase C: Yellow.
d. Field-Applied, Color -Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half - lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
C. Install instructional sign including the color -code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
D. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write -on tags to conductors and list source.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-10
E. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
F. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.
G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush -mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.
H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Metal-backed, butyrate warning signs.
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.
2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8 -inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer
K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-11
a. Indoor Equipment: [Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1 -1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self -adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Enclosed switches.
d. Enclosed circuit breakers.
e. Enclosed controllers.
f. Push-button stations.
g. Power transfer equipment.
h. Contactors.
i. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. j. Battery-inverter units.
k. Battery racks.
l. Power-generating units.
m. Monitoring and control equipment.
n. UPS equipment.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-12
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-1
26 08 00
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Testing, commissioning and startup of electrical system wiring, equipment and grounding.
B. In general inspection, testing and startup is described in the relevant sections of the specifications.
C. Field tests of low voltage conductors and cables are described in Section 26 05
19. D. Field tests of grounding and bonding for electrical systems are described in Section 26 05 26.
E. Field quality control for wiring devices are described in Sections 26 27 26.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 10: Common Work Results for Electrical
B. Section 26 05 19: Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C. Section 26 05 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in necessary trades and crafts and completely familiar with specified requirements and methods for proper performance of Work of this section.
B. Testing of installed equipment shall result in acceptable test results. Equipment for which acceptable test data has not been submitted, or has been submitted but rejected, shall be deemed as not meeting Contract Requirements.
C. Repair or replace items not passing tests.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NETA ATS 1995 Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems
B. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish the following submittals.
SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTION
Pre-Test Submittals Submit at least 7 days before testing Submit test personnel qualifications (resumes)
Submit equipment testing schedule
Equipment Manufacturer’s instructions for testing
manufactured products
Submit test data forms
Post-Test Submittals Submit summary of testing for Work including date and time of all tests
Submit description of equipment tested
Submit description of tests and test procedures
Submit test results
Submit conclusions and recommendations
Submit completed test forms in appendix, including
witness’s signatures.
Submit list of test equipment in appendix including
calibration documents
Submit tabulated data for each piece of equipment tested, including circuit number, equipment or motor name and
tag number (where applicable), nameplate full-ampere
rating, motor service factor, motor ambient temperature rating, overload relay rating, measured full load current, and measured discharge pressures (where applicable)
Note or indicate wiring deviations from Contract
Documents on Project Record Documents.
Deviations from
Contract Documents
1.6 UNIT PRICES
A. Payment for Work in this section shall be included as part of lump-sum or unit- price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING FIRMS
A. Retain qualified engineering appraisal and testing firm to perform inspections, tests, and evaluation to determine equipment designated herein is installed and adjusted for successful energization and operation.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-3
B. Testing firm shall meet Federal OSHA criteria for accrediting testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1910.7, and have a work history and qualifications acceptable to City.
C. Appraisal and testing firm shall have at least 2 years experience in appraising and testing equipment of nature to be tested.
D. Managing or supervising representatives of appraisal and testing firm shall have extensive knowledge of products involved and at least 2 years hands-on experience conducting appraisals and tests. Conduct all testing under supervision of managing or supervising representatives.
E. Testing technicians shall be trained and experienced in type of testing to be performed.
F. Testing firm shall use comprehensive report forms to document engineering appraisal and test results on all equipment and products tested. Upon testing completion, managing or supervising engineering representative shall sign forms prior to inclusion in final report.
G. Obtain written acceptance from City of testing firm prior to beginning testing.
Testing service or personnel may be accepted or rejected based on, but not limited to testing equipment intended to be used, qualifications of firm, completeness of testing forms, and experience and reputation of personnel.
H. Acceptable manufacturers of testing equipment include the following:
ITEM MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER
LOCATION
3-Point Fall-of-Potential
Ground Testing
Equipment
Associated Research,
Inc. Lake Forest, IL
Biddle-Megger Chandler, AZ
Accepted equal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Notify City’s Representative at least 3 days before tests to allow City to witness testing.
B. Examine areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work.
3.2 TESTING
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-4
A. The following testing standards shall be followed:
1. NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) standards
2. Manufacturer’s installation and warranty requirements
3. Applicable OSHA and Cal OSHA regulations
4. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)
5. Other applicable ANSI, ASTM, and NEMA standards.
B. Refer variances between above documents and Contract Documents to City’s Representative.
C. Perform tests to assure electrical equipment will safely operate within industry and Manufacturer’s published tolerances and warranty requirements.
D. Record test result data to be used as baseline for future tests.
E. Report any items failing to pass tests promptly to City’s Representative.
F. Coordinate work to expedite project schedule.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field testing shall include the following, in addition to any other requirements specified in other sections of the specification:
ITEM
TEST FOR
TEST
STANDARD
(ASTM OR
OTHER TEST
STANDARD)
FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY
RETESTS
PAID FOR
BY
Electrical
Work
Installation
Examination
Verify Work is
free from
improper
grounds, short
circuits and
overloads.
1 inspection
Contractor
Contractor
Verify
correctness of
wiring by visual
comparison of
conductor
connections with
connection
diagrams.
Contractor
Contractor
Make individual
circuit continuity Contractor Contractor
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-5
ITEM
TEST FOR
TEST
STANDARD
(ASTM OR
OTHER TEST
STANDARD)
FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY
RETESTS
PAID FOR
BY
checks using
electrical circuit
testers.
3-Point Fall-
of-Potential
Ground Test
Use accepted test
equipment and
test per
Manufacturer’s
instructions
1 test each
ground
Contractor
Contractor
Circuit
Insulation
Resistance
Insulation
resistance
between
conductors and
between each
conductor and
ground shall be
at least 25
megohms.
1 test each
circuit before
energizing
Contractor
Contractor
Project
Equipment
Testing
Test the
following
electrical
equipment items
• MCC.
• Molded Case
Circuit
Breakers.
• Motors.
• VFDs
• Grounding
Electrode
Systems and
Equipment
Grounding
System
• 3-Phase Power
Transformers.
1 test each
piece of project
electrical
equipment,
including 600
volt electrical
distribution
equipment,
motor control
centers, and
grounding
Contractor
Contractor
Motor
Operating
Test –
Insulation
• Perform
routine
insulation
resistance,
Contractor
Contractor
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-6
ITEM
TEST FOR
TEST
STANDARD
(ASTM OR
OTHER TEST
STANDARD)
FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY
RETESTS
PAID FOR
BY
Resistance, continuity and
Continuity, rotation tests
Rotation for all
distribution
and utilization
equipment
including all
motors ½ hp
and larger
before and in
addition to
tests performed
by test
laboratory.
Supply suitable
and stable
source of test
power to test
laboratory at
each test site.
Test laboratory
shall specify
requirements.
Notify test
laboratory
when
equipment
becomes
available for
acceptance
tests. Perform
all testing in
presence of
COUNTY’s
Representative.
Test laboratory
shall be
responsible for
implementing
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-7
ITEM
TEST FOR
TEST
STANDARD
(ASTM OR
OTHER TEST
STANDARD)
FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY
RETESTS
PAID FOR
BY
all final
settings and
adjustments on
protective
devices and tap
changes. Test
laboratory shall
record all test
results and
upon
completion,
assemble and
certify final
test report
Motor
Operating
Test - Current
Record current
in each phase of
each motor ½-hp
and larger and
include in O&M
manual. Repair
or replace motor
or motor-driven
equipment if
current exceeds
motor nameplate
FLC value.
Each phase of
each motor
Contractor
Contractor
Power Compa
Voltage Test
When
installation is
complete and
facility is in
operation, check
n voltage at point
of termination of
Electric Utility
supply to project.
Check voltage
amplitude and
balance between
phases for
Contractor
Contractor
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00-8
ITEM
TEST FOR
TEST
STANDARD
(ASTM OR
OTHER TEST
STANDARD)
FREQUENCY
FIRST
TEST
PAID
FOR BY
RETESTS
PAID FOR
BY
loaded and
unloaded
conditions. If
unbalance as
defined my
NEMA exceeds
1%, or if voltage
varies
throughout day
and from loaded
to unloaded
conditions my
more than +5%
nominal, make
written request
to Electrical
Utility to either
correct condition
or provide
written statement
voltage
variations and/or
unbalance are
within their
normal
standards.
Demonstrate
compliance to
Field
Performance
Contract
Documents and
Manufacturers’
1 test
Contractor
Contractor
printed
Literature
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -1
26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Single meter pedestal with panelboard.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
a. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage ACPower Circuits.
2. Department of Defense Test Method Standard:
a. Mil Std. 220A - Method of Insertion Loss Measurement.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
a. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
b. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
c. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices.
d. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution
Equipment Switches(600 Volts Maximum).
e. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
f. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
4. International Electrical Testing Association:
a. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power DistributionEquipment and Systems.
5. National Fire Protection Association:
a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
a. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
b. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
c. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit-BreakerEnclosures.
d. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -2
e. UL 1449 - Transient voltage Surge Suppressors.
f. UL 1699 - Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Design-Assist Agreement Section 2.15.
B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
D. Source Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.
E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of CONTRACTOR furnished tests and inspections.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. See Design-Assist Agreement.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actualcircuiting arrangements, per Section 2.16 of the Design-Assist Agreement.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing, source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies, and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Design-Assist Agreement: Requirements for spare parts and maintenance materials.
B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish two sets of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike toOWNER's current keying system.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section withminimum 3 years experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE METER PEDESTAL WITH PANELBOARD
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -3
A. Description: 27-000 Single Meter TESCOFLEX Pedestal or equal.
B. Materials: Refer to shop drawings.
C. Enclosures: Refer to shop drawings.
PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect abandoned panelboards and load centers.
B. Maintain access to existing panelboard and load centers remaining active and requiringaccess. Modify installation or provide access panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install panelboards plumb.
C. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
D. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no morethan 4 inches above floor.
E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. Identify each circuit as to its clear, evident, and specific purpose of use.
G. Install engraved plastic nameplates according to Section 26 05 53.
H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling.
1. Minimum Spare Conduits: Two empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.
I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipmentground bars of panels according to NFPA 70.
3.3 REPAIR
A. Repair existing panelboards to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test according to NETA ATS, except Section 4.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 -4
B. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.
C. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
D. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain properphasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean existing panelboards to remain or to be reinstalled.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1
26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Design-Assist Agreement, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.
2. Weather-resistant receptacles.
3. Wall-switch Communications outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.
E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing -label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:
D. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.
E. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).
2. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).
3. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3
4. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. General Description:
1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type.
2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.
3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection.
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2. Cooper; VGF20.
3. Hubbell; GFR5352L.
4. Pass & Seymour; 2095.
5. Leviton; 7590.
C. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A:
Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
2. Cooper; TWR270.
3. Hubbell; RR155WRTR.
4. Leviton; TWR15.
5. Pass & Seymour; 3232TRWR.
6. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper -Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section, when installed in wet and damp locations.
2.5 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES
A. Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
2. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.
4. Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.
2.6 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Material: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.
3. Material for Damp Locations: Smooth, high -impact thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover.
2.7 FINISHES
A. Device Color: White, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.
D. Device Installation:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-5
1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.
5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two -thirds to three - fourths of the way around terminal screw.
6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15 - or 20 -A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
F. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-6
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital -display indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-1
31 23 33
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Earthwork shall consist of performing all operations necessary for excavation, subgrade preparation and grading where applicable.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Codes: All Work shall comply with all codes, as referenced herein.
B. Commercial Standards:
1. ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
2. ASTM D 1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
3. ASTM D 1557 Test Methods for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18- in (457-mm) Drop.
4. ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
5. ASTM D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
6. ASTM D 4829 Standard Test Method for Expansion Index of Soils
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Compaction test results, laboratory test results.
B. Submit copies of grading permits, and permits for disposal of material, if required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: All soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the Owner’s choice. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer at least 24 hours’ notice in advance of required tests.
B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557. In-place, field-density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2922, or by such other means acceptable to the Engineer.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-2
C. Prior to the general placement of any materials and during such placement, the Engineer will select areas within the limits of any work for testing the degree of compaction obtained. The Contractor shall cooperate fully in obtaining the information desired. The frequency of testing shall be as determined and completed by the Engineer. Testing shall be in accordance with the ASTM references listed above.
D. In case the tests of the fill or backfill show noncompliance with the required density, the Contractor shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to ensure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner and shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
E. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422.
F. Unified Soil Classification System: References in these specifications to soil classification types and standards are set forth in ASTM D 2487. The Contractor shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil classifications.
G. Determination of the Expansion Index of the soils shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4829.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection:
1. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling.
2. Do not remove trees from outside excavation or fill areas unless authorized by the Engineer; protect from permanent damage by construction activities.
3. Protect Work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the Project has been completed.
B. Weather:
1. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather or during periods of heavy rainfall when soil moisture conditions will not permit achieving required compaction.
2. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill, fill area or embankment.
3. Do not backfill or construct fill or embankments on frozen surfaces.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SUITABLE MATERIAL
A. Use of onsite materials is acceptable as long as the material does not contain deleterious matter, particles greater than 3 inches in maximum dimension, and is not highly plastic.
B. The upper 5 feet of on-site soils are suitable as reuse as fill. If imported fill is required, the material shall consist of soil and rock mixtures that:
1. Are free of organic material
2. Have a Liquid Limit less than 40 and a Plasticity Index of less than 20
3. Have at least 60 percent material retained on the #200 sieve
4. Have a maximum particle size of 6 inches.
C. Import Material: In general, any unsuitable material that requires removal shall be replaced with Class 2 Aggregate as specified below. If import material is required for site grading operations it shall be granular, low to non-expansive material. The Engineer shall approve any import material prior to use. Any imported fill material needs to be tested to determine its suitability for use as fill material.
D. The following types of backfill materials are designated and defined as follows:
1. Sand: Well graded clean sand with 100% of particles passing the No. 4 sieve and no more than 5% finer than the No. 200 sieve. Material shall have a Sand Equivalent of 30.
2. Class 2 Aggregate Base: The aggregate base shall conform to the provisions of Section 26 (Class 2 Aggregate) of the Caltrans Specifications for 3/4-inch maximum grading.
3. Minor Concrete: The minor concrete shall conform to the provisions in Section 90 -2 “Minor Concrete”, of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
Cementitious material content must be a least 505 lb. /cu yd.
4. Filter Fabric: Non -woven geotextile fabric meeting the minimum requirements per the table below:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-4
2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable Material: Unsuitable soils for use as fill material shall include soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487, fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL. In addition, any soil that cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the percentage of maximum density specified for the intended use shall be classified as unsuitable material.
B. Saturated native materials which are over optimum moisture content shall not be considered "unsuitable" simply because they are too wet for proper compaction.
The Contractor shall, at its cost, prepare these materials in accordance with this specification. Alternatively, the Contractor may remove the native materials and provide imported backfill material, at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The Development Services Construction Inspector may determine whether excess material is unsuitable for backfill.
2.3 PIPE BEDDING AND PIPE ZONE
A. Material:
1. Sump Pump Discharge Pipe: Sand or native material with a sand equivalent of 30. Depth per plans. Any trench soil or moisture condition that prevents the bedding and haunching material from forming a firm and stable base requires the use of ¾ -inch crushed rock for bedding and haunching and foundation as approved by the Owner.
2. Fiber Conduit: Minor concrete.
B. Pipe bedding shall conform to Detail S101.
C. Bedding shall provide uniform and continuous support along the barrel of the pipe. The minimum depth of bedding material shall be provided under the bell.
Blocking of the pipe is not permitted.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-5
D. Loose material shall be removed from the trench bottom and replace with imported material.
E. Where rocky, unyielding, or unsuitable foundation material is encountered, the subgrade shall be excavated a minimum of 12 inches below the pipe and the trench width shall be increased a minimum of 12 inches. The over-excavation shall be replaced with imported material.
F. Where the trench bottom is soft, yielding or unstable, the trench bottom shall be over-excavated. ¾” crushed rock shall be placed in the trench to provide a stable foundation per the Contract Drawings. The rock is in addition to the required pipe bedding used in the pipe zone.
G. Bell holes shall be excavated per manufacturer’s recommendations. The minimum depth of bedding material shall be provided under the bell. Care shall be taken to ensure that the bell hole is no larger than necessary to accomplish proper joint assembly.
2.4 TRENCH ZONE / FINAL BACKFILL
A. Sump Pump Discharge Pipe in Unpaved areas: Native soil.
B. Fiber Conduit: Minor concrete.
2.5 STRUCTURAL FILL UNDER AND AROUND PADS, VAULTS AND
STRUCTURES
A. At least six-inches of 3/4 inch Class 2 Aggregate Base meeting the requirements of Section 26 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL EXCAVATION
A. All trenching within City Streets shall conform to the City’s Trench Cut Ordinance Numbers 3524 and 3602. These ordinances represent a comprehensive pavement protection program incorporating a trench cut cost recovery fee. The trench cut fee provides funds to repair the actual accelerated street damage caused by trenching and is an incentive to promote better trench cut coordination among utility companies
B. Trenching in existing roadways shall be limited to the length of pipe that can be laid that day. No open trenches shall be left overnight. Exposed trenches shall be plated and backfilled as approved by the Development Services Construction Inspector and the Public Works Department.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-6
C. Excavation shall be made to such widths as will give safe room for construction of structures and utilities including bracing, supporting, pumping, and draining.
The bottom of the excavations shall be rendered firm and dry.
D. Pipeline excavation shall be open-cut trenches, unless otherwise specified on the approved improvement plans. All excavations shall adhere to all applicable Federal and State safety requirements. All work shall be conducted in such a manner as to prevent damage to new and existing facilities or adjoining property.
E. Wherever the trench bottom is unstable, the area shall be excavated and an adequate amount ¾ inch crushed rock shall be compacted in place to provide a stable base for the pipe. Pipe bedding material, per approved plans, will be placed on top of stabilized trench bottom.
3.2 TRENCHING WIDTH
A. The trench width shall conform with the Contract Drawings.
B. If for any reason, the trench is more than 8 inches greater than the minimum width, the Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, stronger pipe or corrected bedding conditions as approved by the Owner to meet the load requirements of the changed conditions at the Contractor’s expense. Trenches shall meet OSHA requirements.
3.3 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
A. Materials which are removed from the worksite to accommodate the installation of new facilities shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of at a legal dumpsite.
B. Excess material and materials determined unsuitable for backfill by the Development Services Construction Inspector shall be removed from the project site.
3.4 PREPARATION OF GRADE
A. Loose materials shall be removed from all cut surfaces. Exposed soils shall be scarified to a minimum depth of 6 inches and moistened or dried to the moisture content noted on Section 3.7 below. Material shall be re-compacted to 90 percent compaction noted below based on ASTM D 1557 prior to placing any required backfill or base course.
B. The bottom of all excavations shall be rendered firm and dry.
C. Stabilize soft, loose areas, saturated or unstable trench or manhole by over- excavating to 12-inches below the design bottom and placing 3/4-inch crushed rock completely wrapped in non-woven geotextile fabric. At pipeline joints, overlap geotextile by at least 12-inches.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-7
3.5 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clear all brush, over-sized debris, loose soils, and organic material from areas to be graded.
B. Any excavated areas (i.e., excavations for utility removal) should be restored with properly moisture conditioned and compacted fill.
C. Any loose soil or rock at subgrade will need to be excavated to expose firm natural soils or bedrock
D. Debris, rocks larger than six inches and vegetation are not suitable for structural fill and should be removed from the site
E. Vegetation strippings may be used in landscape areas
F. Subgrade preparation shall consist of scarifying to a depth of about eight inches, moisture conditioning to above optimum, and compacting the finished subgrade to at least 90% relative compaction (ASTM D1557) under the tank and a minimum of 95% relative compaction where under new asphalt pavements and/or the receiving pad.
G. Relative compaction, maximum dry density, and optimum moisture content of fill materials should be determined in accordance with ASTM Test Method D 1557, "Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb.
Rammer and 18-in. Drop."
H. If soft, wet, or otherwise unsuitable materials are encountered at the subgrade elevation during construction, we will provide supplemental recommendations/field directives to address the specific condition.
3.6 FILL PLACEMENT- GENERAL
A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed around nor upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the loads imposed.
B. Fill shall not be placed until after all water is removed from the excavation.
C. Equipment shall be a size and type satisfactory to the on-site geotechnical engineer or Owner’s Construction Inspector. Impact-type pavement breakers or compactors (hydro-hammers) shall not be used within 5 feet of the top of any type pipe. Material for mechanically compacted backfill shall be placed in horizontal lifts which, prior to compaction, shall not exceed the depths specified below for the type of equipment employed. Actual maximum lift depth will vary with soil conditions and compaction equipment.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-8
3.7 PLACING AND SPREADING OF FILL MATERIALS
A. Fill materials and excavated materials to construct berms shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. The fill layers shall be evenly spread so that each layer shall not exceed 8 inches in uncompacted thickness.
B. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity of material in each layer.
C. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content for compaction is achieved.
D. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the specified degree of compaction, the material shall be bladed, aerated, or dried and/or mixed with suitable material with lower moisture content until the moisture content is satisfactory.
3.8 COMPACTION OF FILL MATERIALS
A. Each layer of fill material shall be mechanically compacted to the specified percentage of maximum density. Equipment that is consistently capable of achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used, and each layer shall be compacted over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content.
B. Flooding, ponding, or jetting shall not be used.
C. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1557.
1. On-site soils shall be moisture conditioned to within 2% of the optimum moisture content, placed in thin lifts and compacted to a minimum of 90% relative compaction.
2. Pipe Bedding / Haunching / Initial Backfill: 90% minimum compaction.
Bedding shall be compacted to a minimum 6 -inch thickness below bells, couplings, and joints before placing the pipe.
3. The bedding shall be compacted and leveled to give a uniform surface for laying the pipe. Haunching shall be forced under the pipe and made firm and stable before any material is placed above the springline of the pipe.
Backfill shall be compacted as specified with no damage to the pipe or appurtenances. The initial backfill shall be placed immediately after the pipe joints have been completed and inspected. The initial backfill shall be carefully placed without disturbing and/or damaging the pipe and/or joints, and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe. The initial backfill shall be manually compacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent using care to not damage the pipe or joints. “Manually compacted” does not exclude careful use of hand-controlled, power-operated Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-9
equipment such as air tampers, vibrating tampers, or other hand controlled tools.
4. Final Backfill: 90% minimum compaction.
5. Any structural fill placed under pads, tanks, vaults or catch basins shall be compacted to at least 95% relative compaction.
6. Class 2 AB shall be compacted to at least 95% relative compaction.
7. Fill placed in horizontal loose lifts shall not exceed 8-inches.
D. No placement or compacting shall be done when either the previously placed or the new materials are too wet from rain or excess application of water to obtain the compaction specified. At such time, work shall be suspended until the previously placed and/or new materials have dried sufficiently to permit proper compacting.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 EARTHWORK 31 23 33-10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DISINFECTION OF PIPING 33 01 10-1
33 01 10
DISINFECTION OF PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes requirements for disinfection by chlorination of potable and recycled water mains, services, pipe appurtenances and connections.
1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS
The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for.
AWWA B300 - Standard for Hypochlorites
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
AWWA Standard Methods for the Examination of Water
Section 33 05 10 - General Piping System
Section 33 05 15 - Pressure Piping Systems Testing
Section 33 05 19 - Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings
1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION
A. All water mains, interties, and appurtenances taken out of service for inspection, repairs, or other activity that might lead to contamination shall be disinfected before they are returned to service.
B. All new water mains and interties and temporary pipelines shall be disinfected prior to connection to the Owner’s existing system.
C. All components incorporated into a connection to the Owner’s existing system shall be disinfected prior to installation.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A written disinfection and dechlorination plan, including all methods and equipment to be used, shall be signed by the person responsible for performing the work and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to starting disinfection operations.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Chlorination and dechlorination shall be performed by competent individuals knowledgeable and experienced in the operation of the necessary application and safety equipment in accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local laws and regulations.
The transport, storage and handling of these materials shall be performed in accordance Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DISINFECTION OF PIPING 33 01 10-2
with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response, CFR 49.172 Hazardous Materials Regulations, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194.
1.7 CONCURRENT DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING
The specified disinfection of the pipelines may not be performed concurrently with the hydrostatic testing in accordance with Section 33 05 15.
1.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS
Prior to connection to existing mains, disinfection and bacteriological testing shall be performed in accordance with this specification, and hydrostatic testing shall be performed per Section 33 05 15. Owner authorization for connection to the existing system shall be given only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results.
PART 2 MATERIALS
All materials must be certified to meet NSF/ANSI 61 Standards.
2.1 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (LIQUID)
Sodium hypochlorite is available in liquid form in glass or plastic containers, ranging in size from 0.95 L (1 Qt.) to 18.93 L (5 Gal). The solution contains approximately 10% to 15% available chlorine.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. After successful completion of the hydrostatic test, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to chlorinate all treated water main per AWWA C651 -14 by completely filling the main and appurtenances with water having a 50-100 parts per million (ppm) available chlorine from sodium hypochlorite.
B. The disinfection method shall be the continuous -feed method. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main for at least 24 hours. At the end of the 24 -hour period, the treated water in all portions of the main and appurtenances shall have a residual of not less than 25 parts per million (ppm). If the samples do not pass tests, iterate the disinfection process until a test passes.
C. Care shall be taken to prevent the strong chlorine solution from flowing back into the line supplying the water. A reduced pressure backflow preventer or an air gap must be used for this purpose.
D. After chlorination, the pipeline shall be flushed with treated water per AWWA C651-14. The water in the pipeline shall remain a minimum of 48 hours, after which the Owner shall collect bacteriological samples. These will be tested for coliform by an independent laboratory. The number and location of samples shall be determined by the Owner and shall be randomly chosen from fire hydrants and services. The improvements shall pass if all coliform tests show the most probable Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DISINFECTION OF PIPING 33 01 10-3
number (mpn) is less than 2.2. Failed tests will necessitate additional disinfection as above.
E. The Contractor shall make the necessary piping connections and furnish and install all necessary equipment required for the flushing operations. Velocities in the flushed pipe must be 2.5 feet per second or greater.
F. A reducing agent shall be applied to the water to completely neutralize the chlorine residual prior to discharge of the water. The Contractor shall provide for safe and legal disposal of water from such flushings. The Contractor shall remove all temporary flushing facilities.
G. All costs for chlorination and flushing shall be paid by the Contractor, at no additional expense to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DISINFECTION OF PIPING 33 01 10-4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS TEST 33 05 19-1
33 05 15
PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to perform and complete all pipeline pressure hydrostatic testing for all pressure piping systems, as specified herein.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for conveying test water from the source to the point of usage and also for proper disposal, as required, of water used in the testing operations. All costs associated with supply and disposal of test water shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
1.2 CONRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. A testing schedule, including proposed plans for conveyance, control and disposal of test water shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for review a minimum of 72 hours before testing is to start.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials required for filling and testing the pipelines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
A. Prior to pressure testing, pipelines shall be cleaned of all debris, construction materials, dirt, and any other materials not suitable for inclusion in the completed pipeline. Cleaning shall conclude with water flushing, performed so that the velocity of flushing water is at least 2.5 feet per second in the pipeline to be tested.
B. Contractor shall test all pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field -placed concrete, thrust blocks, and mortar have aged at least 14 days.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS TEST 33 05 19-2
C. Backfill shall meet and pass all compaction requirements, all underground utilities shall be installed, and subgrade shall be completed prior to hydrostatic testing.
D. The Inspector shall be notified forty eight (48) hours prior to testing and must approve any water placement in any portion of the pipeline.
E. The test shall be made by closing valves when available, or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line slowly with water and evacuating all air.
Do not test against closed valves connected to a potable water system. After the pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand with a pressure of 2-20 psi for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, if applicable, to absorb water and allow the escape of air from any air pockets.
During this period, bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to Owner shall be taken.
F. The pipeline shall be filled with water and all air evacuated. For raw and treated water lines, the test pressure shall be 150 psi or 150 percent of static pressure, whichever is greatest. Maintain the test pressure for at least 2 hours. The test pressure shall be measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested.
The amount of water introduced into the pipeline to maintain the test pressure shall be measured volumetrically using a calibrated test reservoir. Accurate means shall be provided for measuring the quantity of water required to maintain full pressure on the line for the test period.
G. Leakage shall be considered as the total amount of water pumped into the pipeline during the test period. The allowable leakage is zero. The allowable leakage for buried piping having threaded, brazed, or welded joints (including solvent welded) shall be zero gallons. Exposed pipe, and pipe with welded, flanged, or coupled joints shall have no leakage.
H. Contractor will be solely responsible for the proper disposal of all water used in the flushing and testing process. Disposal of all water shall be in accordance with appropriate regulatory agency requirements.
I. All flushing and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the Inspector.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION WATER
A. Contractors are prohibited from operating gate valves or fire hydrants not designated for use by the Owner. Acquisition of water through appropriation at un-metered fire hydrants or other facilities is a violation of State Law.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-1
33 05 19
DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to furnish and install all ductile iron pipe and fittings, and all appurtenant work, complete and operable, including all connections, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 2.15 of the Contract Agreement.
B. Certifications properly executed by the manufacturer shall be submitted to the Engineer showing compliance to the requirements of the Specifications. Test data on tests performed shall be provided as requested by the Engineer.
C. Product Data: Provide product data for all materials and equipment proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the work, giving manufacturer's name, catalog number, and catalog cuts for each item where applicable.
D. Shop Drawings: Provide complete pipe layout of each piece and fitting, showing proposed sequence of construction.
E. Test Reports: Contractor shall submit written results of all testing required in this section to the Engineer.
F. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Contractor shall provide manufacturer’s installation instructions for all pipe materials.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: The materials and work performed in this Section shall conform to the applicable standards of:
1. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
2. The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
3. American Welding Society (AWS)
4. American Water Works Association Inc. (AWWA)
5. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)
B. Qualification of manufacturers
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-2
1. The material shall be the product of a supplier regularly engaged in the manufacturing of pipe and plumbing products.
2. All materials shall be new and of current manufacture and shall be guaranteed against defects or workmanship in accordance with the General Conditions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall conform to sizes, capacity, quality and quantities as shown on the drawings or described in these Specifications. Materials shall be from new stock, delivered in good condition. No damaged stock shall be used.
B. Where no method of tests for materials is specified, the latest applicable test specified by ASTM shall be followed.
C. After delivery to the site, all materials shall be carefully unloaded, protected against breakage, rusting, and accumulation of foreign matter, disintegration and injury.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all lost or damaged material supplied and work done under this contract.
2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Specification A21.50- 81 (AWWA C151 -17). Pipelines shall be minimum Pressure Class 150. Pipe 4" diameter thickness shall be Class 51 or better. Pipe 6" through 20" diameter shall be thickness class 50 or better.
B. Ductile iron pipe shall be lined with cement mortar in accordance with the requirement of the “American National Standard for Cement Mortar Lining for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fitting for Water" (ANSI A21.4 / AWWA C104), rated for NSF61, except that lining thickness shall be not less than 3/16” for pipe smaller than twenty four (24) inches in diameter and 14” for pipe twenty four (24) inches in diameter and larger.
C. Ductile iron pipe shall be installed in accordance with the “American National Standard for Installation of Gray and Ductile Cast Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances” (ANSI/AWWA C600). Buried pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the “American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast -Iron Piping for Water and other Liquids” (ANSI A21.5/AWWA C105).
D. All pipe and fittings shall be cement lined with Type V cement mortar lining, sulfate and acid resistant cement, per AWWA C104. Ductile iron or fabricated steel fittings shall conform to AWWA C110, C111, C115 and C153. Steel fittings shall be fusion Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-3
bonded and epoxy-lined and coated. Special fittings may be manufactured from steel pipe in accordance with AWWA C200. Liners shall be rated for NSF61.
E. Joints shall be push -on-type, mechanical, or flanged joints as shown on the Drawings.
F. Flanges shall be cast -on flanges conforming to ANSI/ AWWA A21.10/C110 or thread-on ductile iron conforming to AWWA A2l.l5/C115. Bolt circle and bolt holes shall match those of ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flanges and ANSI B16.5, Class 150 flanges. Where specified, flanges shall be cast -on or threaded -on flanges conforming to ANSI BI6.1, Class 250.
G. Mechanical Joint - Mechanical joint pipe shall be restrained by use of locking rings with lugs that secure the ring to the pipe. Locking rings and lugs shall be fusion - bonded, epoxy-coated, and wrapped in polyethylene as part of the pipe. Mechanical flanged and mechanical joints fitting bolt threads and nuts shall be coated with an approved bituminous material.
H. Gasket material for flanged joints shall be 1/8-inch thick, cloth-inserted rubber, one piece, full faced with holes to pass bolts. Gasket material shall be free from corrosive alkali or acid ingredients and suitable for use in sewage lines. Asbestos gaskets shall not be permitted. Gaskets with integral teeth used to restrain DIP such as “Field Loc” gaskets are not allowed.
I. The exterior surface of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a factory -applied protective coating.
J. Manufacturers:
1. American
2. Electrosteel USA
3. McWane Ductile
4. U.S. Pipe
2.3 BOLTS FOR DUCTILE IRON
A. Bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 193, Grade 138M hex head with ASTM A 194, Grade 8M hex nuts. Plastic washers and sleeves for dielectric joints shall be provided.
2.4 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. All buried ductile iron pipe, ductile iron fittings and all buried services shall be polyethylene encased per AWWA C105/A21.5-10 or latest version.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-4
2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS AND COATINGS FOR PROTECTED VALVES AND PIPES
A. Brass, galvanized steel, copper and stainless steel shall be kept electrically isolated ductile iron and low alloy steel. Eliminate points of direct metallic contact through the use of insulating bushings, PVC Sch. 80 nipples, insulating couplings, or other approved insulating system. Also isolate nonferrous pipe from steel supports and pipe straps by means of insulating sleeves or dielectric tape.
B. Insulating flanged joints shall be provided between DIP and Steel pipe. Insulating flanged sets shall have laminated phenolic gaskets and shall be provided with laminated phenolic sleeves and washers.
PART 3 PLAIN PHENOLIC FLANGE KITS SHALL HAVE 1/16” BACK -UP GASKETS ON EACH SIDE OF THE PHENOLIC GASKET TO AID IN SEALING.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ARE CALPICO, TYPE E.EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer, and shall be subject to its approval before acceptance. All material found during the progress to have defects will be rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such defective materials from the site of the Work.
3.2 PIPE LAYING
A. The pipe shall be installed in conformance with the requirements specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for connecting joints, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface.
B. Proper implements, tools and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer's printed instructions shall be provided and used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of derrick, ropes, or other suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench.
C. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's standard procedures for this operation. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, nor any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-5
D. The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering into the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced. All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. All openings in the pipe line shall be closed with water tight expandable type sewer plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted.
E. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at its own expense.
F. DIP shall be polyethylene-encased in accordance with the Construction Standards and the standard for “Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids” (ANSI/AWWA C-105/A21.5).
3.3 PIPE HANDLING
A. Handling of all pipe shall be done with care to insure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading and installation.
B. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the trench and all defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area.
3.4 FIELD JOINTING
A. Each pipe flanged joint shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations.
B. Prior to connecting flanged pipe, the faces of the flanges shall be thoroughly cleaned of all oil, grease, and foreign material. The rubber gaskets shall be checked for proper fit and thoroughly cleaned. Care shall be taken to assure proper seating of the flanged gasket. Bolts shall be tightened so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform. Torque-limiting wrenches shall be used to insure uniform bearing insofar as possible. If joints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, the gaskets shall be removed and reset and bolts re-tightened.
C. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent trench water from entering pipe. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work.
D. Install pipe joints per AWWA C111.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 33 05 19-6
3.5 FITTINGS
A. All fittings shall be installed utilizing standard installation procedures. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by acceptable means without damage to the fittings. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe or other facility, and joint shall be checked to insure a sound and proper joint.
B. Contractor shall not weld pipe or fitting onto valves.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Horizontal Line Tolerance: 2 inches.
B. Vertical Grade Tolerance: 1 inch. Any deviation with respect to design line and grade shall be recorded at least once per foot and the records shall be submitted to the Engineer as requested. If the alignment is off line or grade, the necessary corrections shall be made to return to the plan alignment at a rate of not more than 1 inch per 25 feet. All corrective work, including new design, if required, shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the District and is subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3.7 REPAIRS
A. Only new pipe free from defects shall be installed.
B. Broken or leaking sections of pipe must be replaced. Repair clamps will not be approved.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Care shall be taken to keep the pipe clean at all times during the installation. Prior to testing the pipe shall be flushed so that the velocities of 5 feet per second are obtained sufficient to clean the entire length of pipe.
B. If the Contractor digs out any sections subsequent to this where debris could enter the line, the line shall be again flushed through the section that was disturbed.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-1
33 11 00
PIPING GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of manufacturers:
1. The material shall be the product of a supplier regularly engaged in the manufacturing of pipe and plumbing products.
2. All materials shall be new and of current manufacture and shall be guaranteed against defects or workmanship.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Material list: Provide product data for all materials and equipment proposed to be furnished and installed under this portion of the work, giving manufacturer's name, catalog number, and catalog cuts for each item where applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. These Specifications are intended to be standard specifications and they may therefore contain specifications for materials not required for this project or allowed on any or various parts of it. Certain materials, which are applicable for only one portion or a small portion, may be shown on the plans and not particularly specified herein.
B. All materials shall conform to sizes, capacity, quality and quantities as shown on the drawings or described in these Specifications. Materials shall be from new stock, delivered in good condition. No damage to stock shall be used.
C. Where no method of tests for materials is specified, the latest applicable test specified by ASTM shall be followed.
D. After delivery to the site, all materials shall be carefully unloaded, protected against breakage, rusting, accumulation of foreign matter, disintegration and injury. The Contractor shall be responsible for all lost or damaged material supplied and work done under this contract.
E. Protective Coating. Except where otherwise specified, ferrous surfaces, exclusive of stainless steel surfaces, shall have a 100% solids epoxy coating. Where sleeves are installed through walls, sleeve shall have a coating and mastic tape applied.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-2
2.2 PVC PIPE
A. Pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 80 pipe.
B. All joints to be solvent weld. Use heavy duty PVC cement and primer.
2.3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE (DIP)
A. As specified in Section 33 05 19 and the provisions of this Section.
2.4 UNDERGROUND TRACER WIRE
A. Tracer wire per drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.
2. Verify that all pipe may be installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
B. Discrepancies:
1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
3.2 HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall provide and use proper implements, tools and facilities for the safe and proper handling and protection of the pipe, all as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid damage to the pipe material or any coating and especially to the ends.
B. When damaged pipe cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner, it shall be removed from the job.
C. Pipe shall be stored in a safe location, protected from the elements where damage therefrom could result.
D. The pipe shall be carefully lowered in the trench to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe be dropped or dumped into trenches. Remove foreign matter and dirt from the inside of the pipe and keep it clean during and after laying.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-3
E. The Contractor shall take care to keep from damaging the pipe by heavy loads and unnecessary compactive effort especially for shallow lifts. All damaged pipe shall be replaced. Normally, repairs will not be acceptable.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install all pipes in strict accordance with plans, profiles, details, typical sections and with manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Engineer.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe Installation - PVC shall be installed in accordance with the AWWA Manual M23 and the manufacturer’s recommendations, except as otherwise provided herein:
1. PVC Pipe shall have been manufactured within the 18 month period prior to installation.
2. Pipe and gaskets shall be kept clean and protected against sunlight and heat damage.
3. Pipe showing signs of physical damage or excessive ultraviolet exposure will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the job site.
4. The pipe shall be installed with the manufacturing label showing on the top.
5. The reference mark or stab line on the spigot end must be flush with the bell end and visible for inspection.
6. Minimum length of pipe for installation shall be 5 feet.
C. All buried cast iron, ductile cast iron and mill -type steel pipe shall be encased in a 5-mil polyethylene wrap. All buried fittings and appurtenances shall be double encased in an 8 -mil polyethylene wrap. Polyethylene wrap shall be manufactured and installed in conformance with ANSI A21.5.
D. Pressure pipe: Pressure pipe shall be laid in accordance with plans and profiles and typical sections. Before new pipe is placed the subgrade material shall be graded so that pipe will rest firmly on undisturbed granular material for its full length.
E. All adjustments to line and grade shall be made by scraping away or filling in the bedding under the body of the pipe, and in no case by wedging or blocking. Pipe shall be laid on an unyielding foundation true to line and grade with uniform bearing under the full length of the pipe with slight hand excavation at the coupling to allow for its thickness.
F. Where soft, wet or spongy conditions are encountered in the trench at pipe subgrade, the subgrade shall be over-excavated and stabilized by placing imported drain rock and geotextile fabric as specified in Section 31 23 33, Earthwork.
G. All pipe, especially the ends, shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is joined.
Whenever work ceases for any reason, the end of the pipe shall be closed with a watertight fitting, plug or cover. The interior of the pipe shall be kept free from Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-4
dirt, foreign material or debris as the work progresses and the pipe shall be cleaned after completion.
H. All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade. Contractor shall set up a grade device parallel to the trench and the cut carefully measured to the pipe. If a laser device is used, it shall be checked periodically and verified for accuracy by measurement from engineered cut stakes.
I. Special care shall be taken to maintain grade, especially on flatter sections of 1% or less. Alignment shall be uniform and true and subject to approval by the Engineer. No dead flat or reverse grades will be allowed.
J. Where specific items are not covered within this Specification, reference shall be made to manufacturer's suggested specifications and installation guides.
3.4 PROTECTION, BARRICADES, ETC.
A. Pipe strung out along the trench or stored where it can be damaged or where injury may result to the public or employees shall have special precautions taken to prevent damage from occurring. Pipe shall not be spread along trenches for extended periods prior to its actual use. Pipe shall be stored in a safe location out of the traveled way and properly barricaded with suitable lights provided to prevent vehicular damage.
B. Where pipe is stored off of a right -of-way, the Contractor shall be required to obtain a letter of consent from the affected property owner prior to storage in such locations. Such letters shall be obtained and given to the Engineer prior to use of private property.
3.5 LAYING, BEDDING
A. All buried pipe shall be laid on a prepared bed as hereinbefore specified. After laying, additional bedding material shall be added to a depth of 3 -inches or about the mid-point of the pipe depending upon diameter, after which it shall be tamped with a suitable tool to secure uniform full -length bedding up to the mid -point of the pipe. Additional bedding material shall then be placed to the depth shown in the standard details of the Plans and compacted by mechanical methods to the specified relative compaction.
B. Take necessary precautions to prevent uplift and floating of the pipe prior to backfilling.
C. Spigot end of pipe shall be laid in direction of normal flow.
D. Water in trenches shall be removed by pumping and not allowed to flow through the pipe.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-5
E. Pipe shall be placed and joined in accordance with manufacturer's and/or Owner’s directions as specified.
F. Each section of pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned before it is installed.
G. The pipe shall be cut to provide closure pieces of correct lengths to permit the proper location of the pipe sections, or to locate valves, fittings, and appurtenant structures where specified on Plans.
H. Temporary, water-tight plugs shall be provided for closure of the open ends of the pipelines each time pipe -laying activity stops and at the end of each working day to prevent the entry of dirt and/or other contaminants.
3.6 CUTTING PIPE
A. General: Cut pipe for inserting valves, fittings, closure pieces, and as otherwise required, in a neat and workmanlike manner without damaging the pipe or lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
B. Dressing cut ends:
1. Dress cut ends of pipe in accordance with the type of joint to be made.
2. Dress cut ends of mechanical joint pipe to remove sharp edges or projections which may damage the rubber gasket.
3. Dress cut ends of push-on joint pipe by beveling, as recommended by the coupling or adapter manufacturer.
3.7 APPURTENANCES
A. General: See plans for location of valves and appurtenances to be installed as a portion of the pipe. The Contractor should note that generally, valves that are clustered are flanged by hub with the entire cluster properly bolted together.
Valves and other appurtenances having hub ends shall be connected to the pipe by means of rubber rings of the same type used to join the pipe.
B. Joining Push-on Joint Pipe: Join pipe with push -on type joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer. Provide all special tools and devices, such as special jacks, chokers and similar items required for the installation. Lubricant for the pipe gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and no substitutes will be permitted.
C. Joining Flanged Joint Pipe: Prior to connecting flanged pipe, the faces of the flanges shall be thoroughly cleaned of all oil, grease and foreign material. The rubber gaskets shall be checked for proper fit and thoroughly cleaned. Care shall be taken to assure proper seating of the flanged gasket. Bolts shall be tightened so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform. Torque -limiting wrenches shall be used to insure uniform bearing insofar as possible. If joints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, the gaskets shall be removed and reset and bolts re-tightened.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-6
3.8 REPAIRS
A. Only new pipe free from defects shall be installed. Portions of broken pipe or short lengths may be used providing they are properly cut back and used as stubs, or short lengths required at structures for flexible joints.
B. Broken or leaking sections of pipe must be replaced. Repair clamps will not be approved.
3.9 SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS
A. When deemed necessary by the Owner, shutdowns of existing in -service pipeline and other distribution facilities shall be made by the Owner as necessary to complete pipeline connections. A shutdown shall be for as short a period as possible and shall be scheduled by the Owner. The amount of lead time necessary for shutdown and connection to existing mains varies with each job and must be planned accordingly. In no case shall a shutdown and/or connection be scheduled with less than 11 days’ notice to the Owner. Make no connections to existing pipes prior to passing pressure and disinfection tests. Interference with the operation of the Owner’s distribution system shall be kept at a minimum. While an existing pipeline is shut down, the connection work shall be performed without interruption, continuing after regular working hours until completed, if necessary unless otherwise directed by the Owner. In some cases, shutdowns must occur at times other than normal working hours and/or days.
B. In all cases, shutdowns shall be made in conformance with the requirements of the Owner, AWWA C651 -14 and local, state, and federal authorities. The Owner shall operate all valves in making a shutdown, restoring pressure to the existing main, and initiating pressure to a new installation. The Contractor is required to obtain all necessary discharge permits. The Contractor shall make the necessary piping connections, furnish and install all necessary equipment required for the high velocity flushing operations. The Contractor shall provide for safe and legal disposal of water from such flushing’s. The contractor shall remove all temporary flushing facilities. All costs for the permits, chlorination, and flushing shall be paid by the contractor.
C. The Owner shall be notified at least 11 working days prior to any connection operations. Contractor is required to submit a shutdown, testing, and discharge plan to the Owner that illustrates their means and methods of complying with this section. The plan shall be submitted at the time of notification.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Care shall be taken to keep the pipe clean at all times during the installation. Prior to testing the pipe shall be flushed so that the velocities of 5 feet per second are obtained sufficient to clean the entire length of pipe.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-7
B. If the Contractor digs out any sections subsequent to this where debris could enter the line, the line shall be again flushed through the section that was disturbed.
3.11 TESTING AND FINAL CLEANING
A. Testing and final cleaning of all pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 05 15 Pressure Piping Systems Testing and Section 33 01 10, Disinfection of Piping.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PIPING GENERAL 33 11 00-8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-1
33 14 19
VALVES AND APPURTENANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes the supply and installation of the following valves and appurtenances:
1. Pressuring Reducing Valve
2. Butterfly Valve
3. Check Valve
4. Ball Valve
5. Flange Coupling Adapters
6. Sump Pump
7. Control Switch
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Product data sheets for make and model.
2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction.
B. Quality Control Submittals
1. Manufacturer’s Instructions:
a. Installation and testing of products specified.
b. Pipeline tapping and service saddle installation.
2. Operation and maintenance manual.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. Valve working pressure: Minimum 150 psi unless otherwise specified or shown
B. Product Handling:
1. Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.
2. The Contractor shall provide and use proper implements, tools and facilities for the safe and proper handling and protection of the material.
3. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer, and at no additional cost to the Owner.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-2
4. When damaged material cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, it shall be removed from the job.
5. Material shall be stored in a safe location, protected from the elements where damage could result.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The material shall be the product of a supplier regularly engaged in the manufacturing of pipe and plumbing products.
B. For the actual assembly, installation, and testing of the work of this section, use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely familiar with the requirements for this work and with the installation recommendations of the manufacturers of the specified items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Valve assemblies and appurtenances shall have a rated working and test pressure equal to or greater than the operating and test pressure of the pipe.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all valves, valve -operating units, stem extensions, and other accessories. All valves of the same style or type shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. All valves shall have the name of the maker and the working water pressure for which they are designed cast in raised letters upon some appropriate part of the body. All valves shall be new and of current manufacture. All shut -off valves, 6 -inch and larger, shall have operators with position indicators if located above ground. Where buried, these valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing valve stem extensions as required. Buried valves shall not have position indicators. Valves mounted higher than 5-foot 0-inches above working level shall be provided with chain operators.
C. Wherever stainless steel is specified in this Section, it shall be AISI Type 316, unless otherwise specified.
D. Protective Coating. Except where otherwise specified, ferrous surfaces, exclusive of stainless steel surfaces, in the water passages of all valves 4 -inch and larger, as well as the exterior surfaces of all valves, shall be have a 100% solids epoxy lining and coating. Flange faces of valves shall not be coated. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that such coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with these Specifications.
E. Manual Valve Operators. Each manually operated valve shall be provided with a 2” square actuating nut, handwheel or lever operator. Manual valve operators Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-3
shall be designed for not less than 125 percent of the operating torque required for the service. Handwheels shall be sized to require an operating force of not more than 40 pounds, and shall have arrows cast thereon to indicate the direction of rotation for opening the valve. Valves shall open counterclockwise.
F. Valve Labeling.
1. Except when such requirement is waived by the Owner in writing, provide an identification label on all valves exclusive of hose bibbs. The label shall be 1/16-inch stainless steel, minimum 2 inches by 4 inches in size, and shall be permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the Owner.
G. Bolts, Gaskets, Glands, Nuts
1. Bolts, gaskets, glands, nuts, and miscellaneous accessories required to install all valves are to be furnished.
2. Bolts shall be as specified in Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. Bolts for flanged connections shall be galvanized steel with American Standard regular unfinished square or hex heads. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, stainless steel bolts shall be used. Underground bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, unless specifically noted to the otherwise
3. Nuts shall be galvanized steel with American Standard regular hexagonal dimensions.
4. Gaskets for flanged connections shall be suitable for the pressure, temperature, and chemical characteristics of the fluid handled. The gasket materials shall also be suitable for the pipe system physical characteristics and materials. Gaskets shall extend from the inside diameter of the flange to at least the inside edge of the bolt holes or they may extend beyond the bolt circle.
5. Jointing materials for mechanical joints shall conform to ANSI A21.11.
H. Where no method of tests for materials is specified, the latest test specified by ASTM shall be followed.
2.2 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cla-Val, model 131-01 PRV
a. Contractor to confirm model number with the manufacturer prior to ordering and fabrication, based on the requirements herein and approval by the Engineer.
B. Service: Treated water
C. Valve design:
1. Hydraulically operated
2. Signal diaphragm actuated
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-4
3. Globe pattern
4. NSF/ANSI 61 standard certified
5. End connection: flanged per ASME/ANSI B16.42, Class 150 (250 psi max)
6. Upstream and downstream pressure transmitter included and meeting the requirements of Section 40 73 00.
7. Upstream and downstream pressure gauges included and ranging from 0 to 100 psi.
8. During a power outage, valve will remain open in the last position.
9. Main Valve Body
a) Valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc with a rectangular cross section contained on three and one half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert.
b) The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic stainless steel stem.
c) The valve seat shall be a solid, one-piece design.
10. The main valve seat and stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable.
11. Pilot Control System: The pilot control shall be through two direct acting two-way solenoid pilot valves controlled by an external power source. The pilot control system shall include strainers and solenoid manual by- pass valves. The pilot control system shall utilize copper control tubing and brass fittings. The solenoid pilot valves either add or relieve line pressure from the cover chamber of the main valve, causing it to open or close as directed by the electronic controller. Solenoids shall have NEMA IV enclosures.
12. Valve features shall include the following
a. Two hydraulic controls: electronic pressure relief CRL pilot and electronic pressure reducing CRD-34 pilot
b. CK2 Isolation Valve
c. CV Flow Control (Closing)
d. X117D Series Position Transmitter
e. Two (2) X141 Pressure Gauges
f. CV Flow Control (Opening)
g. Two (2) X141 PT-Pressure Transmitters
h. Differential Pressure Transmitter
D. Materials:
1. Body and cover: ductile iron-ASTM A536
2. Main Valve Trim: stainless steel
3. Stem, nut and spring: stainless steel
4. Seal disc: Buna-N Rubber
5. Diaphragm: Nylon Reinforced Buna-N Rubber
6. Pilot: bronze
7. Tubes and fittings: stainless steel
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-5
8. End detail: ductile iron ANSI B16.42 Class 150
E. Fusion bond epoxy lined (12 mils minimum) and coated (8 mils minimum).
2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVE
A. Size: As indicated on the plans
B. Manufacturers:
1. Pratt, model 2FII, MKII, HP-250 & Groundhog
2. Crispin, K-Flow 500 Series
3. Clow, Series 4500
4. M&H, AWWA Butterfly Valves
5. Mueller, Lineseal III, Lineseal XP
C. Service: Treated water
D. Valve Design:
1. Bonded Seat
2. Flanged
3. Rated for 150 psi
4. Offset disc design, not diaphragm
E. Materials
1. Body: Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
2. Disc: Ductile iron or stainless steel
3. Tangential Pin: 316 Stainless Steel, ASTM A276, Type 316
4. Seat: NBR or EPDM
5. Shaft: 316 Stainless Steel, ASTM A276, Type 316
6. O-Ring: EPDM
7. Screw: stainless steel
F. Certified to ANSI/NSF 61
2.4 CHECK VALVE
A. Check valves 1-1/2” and smaller shall be PVC ball check valves with Viton seals.
B. Manufacturer:
1. Asahi/American True Union Ball Check Valve
2. Hayward Safe Block True Union
3. or equal.
C. Service: Treated water
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-6
2.5 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves
1. Schedule 80 PVC, union type end connections and stubs ends for joining by socket welding.
2. Normal impact
3. Teflon seat ring
4. Pressure rating of 150 PSI.
2.6 BRASS AND BRONZE COMPONENTS
A. Brass and bronze components of valves and appurtenances that have surfaces in contact with the water shall be alloys containing less than 16 percent zinc and 2 percent aluminum.
B. Approved alloys are ASTM B61, B62, B98 (alloy A, B, or D), B139 (alloy A), B143 (alloy 1-B), B164, B194, B292 (alloy A), and B127.
C. Stainless steel alloy 18 -8 may be substituted for bronze at the option of the manufacturer and with the approval of the Owner
2.7 ELECTROLYSIS CONTROL
A. Furnish and install magnesium anodes for all buried valves per Contract drawings.
B. Tracer wires shall not be welded or attached any ferrous metal fittings or appurtenances.
C. Magnesium anodes shall be manufactured by Calpico Inc. or approved equal.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Flange Coupling Adapters: Couplings shall be ductile iron or fabricated steel construction fusion bonded epoxy coated. Flanged coupling adapters shall be restrained type Romac Industries or equal.
B. Sump Pump: Pump shall be submersible and actuated with a vertical float switch integral to the unit, with a non -clogging vortex impeller, able to pass 1/2 -inch diameter solids. Rated for 1/2HP, 115V AC, 60 Hz. Body material shall be cast iron. Flow rate shall be 45 gpm at 15’ TDH. Check valve on the suction line shall be included. Manufacturer: Zoeller M98 or equal.
C. Control Switch: Mechanically activated control switch to send an alarm to the PLC for rising water levels in the pressure reducing valve vault. Switch shall not be sensitive to rotation. Switch shall have a high level where the switch turns on Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-7
(closes) when the switch tips slightly above horizontal signaling a high level, and turns off (opens) when the switch drops slightly below horizontal. Switch shall have a low level where the switch turns on (closes) when the switch tips slightly below horizontal signaling a low level, and turns off (opens) when the switch tips slightly above horizontal. Manufactured by SJE Rhombus, model Signalmaster Control Switch or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves:
1. All valves, operating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and as shown and specified. Valves shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.
2. Before installation, carefully clean valves of all foreign material, adjust stuffing boxes, and inspect valves in open and closed positions. Unless otherwise indicated, install valves with the stem vertical. Mount horizontal valves in such a manner that adequate clearance is provided for operation.
All valves shall be installed to provide easy access for operation, removal, and maintenance and to avoid conflicts between valve operators and structural members, handrails, piping, etc.
3. Prior to installing flanged valves, the flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned. After cleaning, insert the gasket and tighten the nuts progressively and uniformly. If flanges leak under pressure, loosen the nuts, reseat or replace the gasket, re-tighten the nuts, and retest the joint.
Joints must be watertight at test pressures before acceptance.
4. Thoroughly clean threads of screwed joints by wire brushing, swabbing, or other approved method. Apply approved joint compound to threads prior to making joint. Joints shall be watertight at test pressures before acceptance.
5. Orient valve in vault with easy access to operator.
6. Replace valves that drip or do not function properly.
7. Magnesium anode shall be driven completely into native soil at 45 degree.
8. Contractor shall confirm clearance between proposed anode location and other utilities in close proximity prior to driving anode.
9. Buried valves shall be double encased in an 8-mil polyethylene wrap.
Polyethylene wrap shall be manufactured and installed in conformance with ANSI A21.5.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 33 14 19-8
3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Test that valves open and close smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the other in both directions for two -way valve and applications.
B. Hydrostatic Testing: Test valves and related materials in accordance with Section 33 05 15 Piping Systems Testing, at the same time that the adjacent pipeline is tested. Joints shall show no visible leakage under test. Repair joints that show signs of leakage prior to final acceptance. Protect control systems or operators that might be damaged by the pipeline test, repair damage caused by testing.
C. Anode Testing: After backfilling, but prior to paving, test installation to confirm anodes are properly connected. If test indicates a disconnected anode, correct the installation and retest.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-1
40 61 00
INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes the general work description and requirements for instrumentation provided by this contract.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It is a requirement of this specification that all Division 40 specifications be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the entire system performance and compatibility of this section, as well as all other Division 40 specifications.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:
A. Section 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Other Submittals of the Design-Assist Construction Agreement
B. All Division 40 specifications.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC).
E. NFPA 79 – NEC (Labeling).
F. ISA - Standards 5.1 and 5.4.
G. IEC 1131-3 – Programming Standards.
1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. All Division 40 specifications shall be submitted in one shop drawing.
Requirements of individual specification sections shall be contained within a single Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-2
section in the shop drawing submittal. Indicate individual specification sections with a protruding tab. Submit material in the format and order as described in paragraph 1.05.B.3.
B. Shop Drawing Submittal Format
1. Shop drawings shall be submitted electronically via PDF.
2. Provide title page in the PDF. Title page shall include job name, GHD job number, Contractor(s) job number(s), date, “Division 40 Shop Drawing”, Contractor and supplier(s) names, addresses, contact persons, and contact numbers.
3. Contents shall be organized accordingly.
a. Table of Contents – List of each section. Provide protruding tabs labeled with the pertinent heading for each section listed in the Table of Contents.
b. For each Division 40 specification section, provide the following within the respective sections:
1) Table of Conformance.
2) Training itinerary.
3) Bill of Materials (BOM) for installed equipment, BOM for spare parts, and BOM for extra materials. Each BOM shall be grouped and identified separately.
4) Equipment information satisfying specifications. Provide protruding tabs for each piece of equipment. Label each tab with the equipment manufacturer.
c. AutoCAD Drawings – Include title block, border, page numbers, and supplier job number. USB flash drive containing all Division 40 AutoCAD 2019, or higher, *.dwg files. Sheet/drawing titles shall utilize three lines in the title block and are subject to approval, and instructed change, by the Engineer.
4. AutoCAD drawings shall be 11-inch by 17-inch.
5. Shop drawings not containing the appropriate performance affidavit(s), date dependency affidavit(s), or format will be returned without further review.
C. Shop Drawing Submittal Contents - The following requirements pertain to all of Division 40 specifications. Refer to individual Division 40 specifications for further requirements.
1. Include a complete Table of Conformance to each paragraph, or part, of Part II in the respective specification. Use a Microsoft Word 2019 table format with four columns labeled as “Specification Section”, “Equipment Manufacturer”, “Equipment Model”, “Compliant (Y/N). If No, specify”. As a minimum, identify equipment compliance in the “Compliant (Y/N). If No, specify” column for each article (i.e., 2.02), letter heading (i.e., A, B, C), and each number heading (i.e., 1, 2, 3). For exceptions or deviations, include a narrative description as to how the deviation or exception can benefit the system over that which is specified.
2. Training Itinerary – Detailed itinerary for the training to be provided in Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-3
Microsoft Word 2019 table format. Itemize the day of training (“Day 1,” “Day 2,” or “Hour 1,” “Hour 2,” etc.) and the lessons to be taught during that period. Further discuss the equipment to be used during training and the proposed location of training for that day. Account for all days of specified training. Provide one training itinerary sheet for each training period. At the top of each sheet provide a header description of the training session and duration of training to be provided.
3. Detailed Bill of Materials in Microsoft Word 2019 table format, or Excel 2019, identifying component name, manufacturer, model number, and quantity supplied. Typical Bills of Materials are not acceptable.
4. Descriptive lists of spare parts and extra materials provided in the same tabular format as the Bill of Materials. Lists shall be exclusive to the spare parts and extra materials requested by the specification section, hence separate from the Bill of Materials for installed equipment. Lists shall be intuitive and specifically created for this project.
5. For individual equipment, submit information satisfying every item discussed in Part II of that specification section. Additionally, submit on all supporting accessories including, but not limited to, terminal blocks, surge and lightning suppression, UPSs, fuses, and cabling.
6. Proposed nameplate wording. Scaled illustrations for each nameplate provided.
7. Manufacturer’s literature and Web site printouts are independent of the above requests for information and, hence do not satisfy the above shop drawing requirements. All catalog cuts, Web site printouts, manufacturer’s specifications, and drawings shall be clearly marked to allow identification of the specific products used. Cross -out all options and functions not supplied with the equipment.
8. Electrical power requirements, connection requirements, interconnecting cabling, and environmental limitations/restrictions.
9. Dimensions and weights of the equipment with the specified options.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. The following requirements pertain to all of Division 40 specifications and are intended to complement the requirements of Section 33 – Utilities as well as individual Division 40 specifications.
B. Provide complete sets of hard -covered three-ring bound loose leaf Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. In addition to “as -built” system drawings, the manuals shall include internal wiring diagrams and operating and maintenance literature for all components provided under Division 40. Binders shall not be larger than 3 inches.
C. Utilize a Table of Contents listing major headings (blue tabs) and sub -major headings (white tabs). Provide protruding tabs labeled with the pertinent heading for each item listed in the Table of Contents. Tab labels shall be permanently fixed to semi-rigid section dividers. Otherwise, utilize the same format as specified for Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-4
shop drawing submittals.
D. Submitted literature shall be in sufficient detail to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, programming and configuration, adjustment, calibration, testing, and maintenance of each component and/or instrument. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
E. In a separate binder, include the configuration settings for each instrument provided in Division 40. Provide a Table of Contents with protruding tabs for each instrument. Label each protruding tab with the equipment name and equipment designation. Indicate the value of all configuration parameters and setpoints, including those that are not utilized in the equipment’s field configuration.
F. Contractor shall review all submitted literature and cross out all options, functions, warranties, etc. not part of the supplied equipment.
G. All information contained within the hard copy of the O&M manual shall also be submitted in electronic form on USB flash drive. Including, but not limited to, manufacturer information, drawings, and letters.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following requirements pertain to all of Division 40 specifications and are intended to complement the requirements of Section 33 – Utilities, as well as individual Division 40 specifications.
B. Submit under provisions of Sections 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.
C. Record actual locations of controller cabinets and input and output devices connected to system. Include interconnection wiring and cabling information, and terminal block layouts in controller cabinets.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions per design assist construction agreement; and 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.
B. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.
C. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Refer to Contract Drawings for designations and verify with Owner.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-5
B. Coordinate demonstration to Owner with the Engineer and the Owner.
1.10 TRAINING
A. Contractor shall video -record all training sessions. Provide a video recording of each training session on a single USB flash drive. Provide two duplicate USB flash drives for each training session and distribute one copy to the Owner and one to the Engineer. Provide computer -generated adhesive labels on each USB flash drive.
Label each USB flash drive with the training session description, date training occurred, attendees, trainer, contact information, the equipment covered during the training session, and the project title.
B. Engineer will review their copy for video quality including, but not limited to, picture quality, use of camera angles, and sound recording quality. Video must be clearly audible. If the Engineer deems the video or audio quality as poor, the Contractor shall conduct the training session again (with original attendees present) and re-record the session at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Provide a USB flash drive case to hold all training tapes provided for Division 40 specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESSORIES
A. Nameplates
1. Laminated plastic nameplates shall be provided for each instrument in Division 40.
2. Nameplates shall have 5/16 -inch high capital, white letters on black background machine engraved. Hang nameplates from process -mounted instruments via metallic chains. Nameplates shall be hung within 12 inches of the equipment.
3. Final wording on nameplate shall be submitted during the shop drawing phase and approved by the Engineer.
4. Nameplates shall be uniformly mounted and of identical form-factor for all equipment that nameplates are provided. Once a nameplate format has been selected, the format shall be utilized for all equipment throughout, thereby excluding providing original equipment manufacturer (OEM) nameplates.
5. Where wire labeling is not conducive to nameplate tagging as specified above, such as in MCC compartments or inside the programmable logic controller (PLC) enclosure, provide wire labeling on computer printed, adhesive tape, and wraparound wiring. Printing that is capable of being rubbed off the wire label is not acceptable.
6. Text on nameplates shall be as follows.
a. First Line – Equipment name. Equipment name shall as listed on the Contract Drawings and PLC input/output (I/O) lists.
b. Second Line – Equipment designation. Designation shall be in Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-6
accordance with ISA Standards 5.1 and 5.4 as listed in the PLC I/O lists and on the Contract Drawings.
c. Third Line – Wiring destination. Indicate the destination of the wiring (i.e., PLC-1, PLC-2, MCC-PI, etc.).
B. Lightning and Surge Protection (TVSS)
1. Provide lightning and surge protection on the power supply of each instrument provided under Division 40.
2. Provide lightning and surge protection on all analog input and output signal circuits that pass out of doors or are terminated to metallic piping that passes out of doors.
3. TVSS devices mounted on the analog output signal wiring of field-mounted transmitters shall be conduit -mounted utilizing a common chamber, three element, gas tube and clamp incoming transients to a level acceptable to the transmitter it is protecting. Manufacturer shall be Bourns, Model 1669 -01, or equal.
4. TVSS devices protecting analog circuits entering the PLC enclosure shall be din -rail mounted with removable terminal blocks on each side of the device with no interruption of the incoming signal by unplugging the TVSS device. Device shall possess the capability of discharging 1000 Amps evaluated on an 8x20-microsecond waveform. Device shall have an LED to indicate the unit is functioning properly. TVSS device shall be manufactured by M-System Co, Model MDP-24-1, or equal.
C. Wiring/Conduit/Mounting
1. The Contractor shall provide all power wiring and conduit to each instrument specified in Division 40.
2. The Contractor shall provide all signal wiring and conduit from the PLC to new and existing equipment as specified in the I/O list of Section 40 60 43, PLC, and the Contract Documents.
3. The Contractor shall provide all other wiring integral to supplied equipment to achieve the specified system performance as discussed individual Division 40 sections.
4. The Contractor shall mount all equipment specified in Division 40 in locations discussed/shown in the Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING
A. All mounted equipment shall have sufficient clearance from other provided or existing obstructions (including walls, pipes, conduit, or other instruments) to facilitate removal, adjustment, inspection, and calibration of the installed device.
Any device that is mounted without sufficient clearance to perform these functions with standard, manufacturer recommended tools shall be removed and remounted at no additional cost to the Owner.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-7
B. Rotate equipment heads as directed by the Engineer in the punch list for final completion.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 INSTRUMENTATION 40 61 00-8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-1
40 61 21
CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the requirements of the Control Systems Integrator (CSI).
The Contractor is required to subcontract a CSI with qualifications and a scope of work as specified herein.
B. PCWA will self-perform all Control Systems Integration from PCWA’s PLC. This means the control logic and screen development and SCADA implementation will be done by PCWA and will need to be coordinated with the Contractor’s CSI and electrician.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CSI shall provide testing and startup services to assist the Contractor with commissioning of the process control system and related instrumentation.
B. Termination and labeling of conductors as specified herein
C. Division 40 - Complete responsibility for the provision of all Division 40 requirements, including equipment and services, as specified in the respective specification.
D. Modify control panels, termination and marshaling panels, customized instrumentation mounting brackets, outdoor instrumentation housing enclosures.
E. Existing Conditions - Modify existing control circuits and control panels as required by the Contract Documents.
F. Supply quantities of CSI field technician personnel as specified herein for the duration necessary for system installation, startup and commissioning of the new systems and upgrades of existing systems.
G. Provide manufacturer's services for installation, configuration and testing of equipment where specified. Manufacturer's representatives who are not under direct employment of the equipment manufacturer are permitted only where specified in the Contract Documents.
H. Take ownership of all equipment being furnished through the CSI. Coordinate efforts associated with manufacturer's technicians and representatives for services required during installation, configuration, calibration, startup and troubleshooting of equipment. Coordination shall occur in a timely fashion as to not delay the project schedule.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-2
I. Fabrication, configuration, testing, startup and implementation of the Process Control System (PCS), control panels, instrumentation and electrical equipment as specified herein and required to construct a highly available, efficient, reliable, and operable system.
Conduct and coordinate CSI coordination meetings and attend progress meetings as specified herein.
1.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR QUALIFICATIONS
A. The CSI shall be regularly engaged in the business of instrumentation and controls and shall be responsible for the supply, coordination, and installation of the equipment as specified herein.
B. The CSI shall demonstrate the requisite resources of in -house staff, facilities and finances to complete the project in the schedule specified. These resources shall include personnel who are direct payroll employees of the CSI to engineer, design, implement, fabricate, stage, and test the entire integrated hardware and software system at the CSI's facilities. In -house personnel shall include all disciplines associated with system manufacture, fabrication, and integration to include but not be limited to engineering, drafting, analog and digital control systems and wiring design, construction, wiring, labeling, software configuration, test/demonstration programming, project management, quality control, field engineering and training.
C. The CSI shall assign a specific person to be the CSI Project Manager for this project. The Project Manager shall be a direct employee of the CSI, shall be assigned to this specific project, and shall be skilled and experienced in project management of the type of work described herein. The Project Manager shall be assigned for the period of the Contract. Should it become necessary to replace the CSI project manager, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the credentials of the person assigned as a replacement.
D. The CSI shall maintain a UL 508 listed fabrication shop located at the CSI facility for the assembly of the various control panels, cabinets, consoles, instrument racks, enclosures, and wiring required for this project. This shop shall be available for inspection by the Engineer to observe quality control and workmanship. The CSI facilities shall include hardware and software owned by the CSI for development and support of any system software, testing, and demonstration equipment to be utilized on the project.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Process Control System (PCS) - Network of one or more PLCs, PLC HMIs, and/or computers. Synonymous with Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system.
B. Contract Documents - Comprised of both the Contract Drawings and Contract Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-3
Specifications.
C. Fieldbus Networks - Reference to a family of industrial network protocols. Fieldbus networks may include Foundation Fieldbus, Profibus, Profinet, Ethernet IP, Modbus TCP, Modbus Serial, Modbus 485, DH+, DeviceNet, ControlNet, and others.
D. Resident Project Representative (RPR) - On-site team that enforces the Contract Documents and witnesses most demonstrations. May, or may not, be the design Engineer.
E. Contractor - Where used herein, refers to the Prime, or General, Contractor. The contractor to which this CSI is subcontracted.
1.5 CSI COORDINATION AND MEETING REQUIREMENTS
A. The CSI shall collaborate with the Contractor in scheduling of all work.
B. Schedule testing and demonstrations in writing with the Engineer and Owner at least two weeks in advance of the proposed date(s).
C. The CSI shall perform the detailed integration and coordination of the control systems and instrumentation equipment furnished in accordance with this specification. Work shall be performed by the CSI's own staff and related equipment manufacturer's engineers where applicable, including submittal drawings, operations and maintenance manuals, record drawings, equipment testing, operational demonstrations, and other applicable documentation.
D. Coordination with Process Mechanical Equipment Manufacturers
1. Coordinate with process mechanical equipment manufacturer's in order to obtain control system requirements and special control components. The CSI shall review and coordinate with the equipment manufacturer's submittals.
2. The Engineer and RPR are not required to supply information to the CSI that is available from within this project's contract, including supplier information, when the CSI is capable of obtaining such information directly.
E. The CSI shall take detailed meeting minutes (i.e., record of meeting discussions) for all meetings attended by the CSI. Meeting minutes shall:
1. Identify all topics of discussion and all pertinent details of each topic.
2. Identify the party that is speaking for each topic and each statement that is recorded.
3. Categorize statements as ideas or agreed-upon actions.
4. Record meeting date(s) and time(s), as well as attendees of the meeting.
F. Required Meetings
1. Initial Coordination Meeting
a. Schedule, coordinate, and host an initial coordination meeting with Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-4
the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer to review the scope and schedule of the project. The meeting shall be attended by the CSI Project Manager and all other parties involved in the integration of the control system. CSI shall come equipped with the approved Detailed Work Plan.
2. CSI Progress Meetings
a. Schedule, coordinate, and host CSI -specific progress meetings during the course of the project to coordinate integration requirements with the equipment manufacturers and Contractors, and upon key project milestones. The CSI shall hold a minimum of 2 progress meetings at the project site. The progress meetings shall be held at an agreeable time for the Owner, Contractor, and Engineer. Additional meetings shall take place as required to coordinate the work.
b. Develop the meeting agenda and distribute to the attendees a minimum of three days prior to the meeting for review. Update agenda with reviewer's comments and come prepared to address attendee's questions. Provide copies of all handouts for all attendees. c. Equipment Modifications Field Meetings - Schedule, coordinate, and host on-site meetings with the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer as required to overview modifications to existing equipment and systems. The meeting shall be attended by the CSI Project Manager and all other parties involved in the integration of the control system.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. References - Materials and installation shall be in accordance with the latest revisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements have been specified in the Contract Documents:
1. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
2. ASME - The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
3. ASTM - The American Society for Testing Materials
4. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association
5. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
6. ISA - Instrument Society of America
7. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
8. NEC - National Electrical Code
B. Quality Control
1. All components shall be new and of the most current and proven design. All components shall be approved for the intended application and shall be installed and wired in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.
2. All new electrical equipment and control panels, and their components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled as a completed assembly.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-5
A. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with the individual Division 40 specification requirements.
B. Submittals shall include the following:
1. Detailed Work Plan - Submit within 15 days of the Notice to Proceed.
Submittals sent to the Engineer from the CSI before the detailed work plan is approved will be returned “Not Reviewed.” In scheduling review time for the work plan, allocate time for three resubmittals before approval.
2. Shop Drawings, Operations and Maintenance, and Project Record Documents - In scheduling review time for individual shop drawings, allocate time for a minimum of two resubmittals.
3. Equipment Inventory, Calibration, and Validation Workbook
4. Factory Acceptance Test plan, schedule, and forms.
5. Field Testing, Demonstration, Validation - Shall be approved by the Engineer before any field tests are performed.
6. Training syllabus.
1.8 DETAILED WORK PLAN
A. Submit an overall work plan that details tasks to be performed on this project in sufficient detail to demonstrate a complete understanding of the CSI's scope of work, interdependency of tasks and milestones, sequence of construction, and realistic duration of tasks.
B. Contents shall address and include:
1. Schedule - Electronically generated schedule that identifies all tasks required of the CSI, including individual entries for overall project milestones, each shop drawing, submittal dates for each submittal required above, specified meetings, fabrication periods for individual PLCs, testing periods for individual PLCs, programming services for individual PLCs, installation and network testing of networks, modifications to existing components and systems, installation acceptance, final acceptance, and training periods for equipment. Refer to Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design -Assist Construction Agreement and individual Division 40 sections for required installation acceptance, final acceptance, and training days required.
2. Communications Plan - Provide an organizational chart for the CSI, including email, office phone, office fax, and mobile phone numbers for all project participants. Submit a communications plan that allows communication directly between the Engineer and one contact within the CSI's organization. Include written authorization from the CSI's Prime Contractor that also establishes the terms of Engineer -to-CSI correspondence.
3. Risks - Identify any risks to delivering the scope of work on time and on budget. Identify any long lead time equipment items. Present recommended solutions to mitigate identified risks.
4. Outages - Provide a detailed plan that identifies all outages that will be Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-6
required during construction to complete the project. The plan shall identify the following:
a. Sequence of outages.
b. Equipment, PLC, or system that will be affected by each outage. c. Duration of each outage.
d. Proposed date(s) for each outage.
e. List of specific tasks to be completed during the outage. f. Means by which equipment can be controlled if a PLC is removed. g. If the outage requires a process shutdown.
5. CSI initial coordination meeting agenda.
6. CSI progress meeting agenda template.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE, AND RECORD
DOCUMENTS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Equipment shall only be ordered after shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Engineer. Equipment procured without Engineer approval may need to be uninstalled, returned, exchanged, and/or replaced at the Contractor's cost. Equipment ordered that does not address all the Engineer's shop drawing comments are subject to complete replacement, rather than refurbishment or modification, if modification of the supplied unit impacts aesthetics, intended functionality, schedule, or cost at the Engineer and Owner's option.
2. If deviations to the Contract Documents are proposed, the CSI shall submit a detailed description and explanation for each proposed deviation to the Contract Documents.
B. Shop drawing, operations and maintenance, and project record document requirements of Section 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Other Submittals of the Design -Assist Construction Agreement are intended to complement submittal requirements of individual specification sections.
C. Record Drawings
1. Submit complete and accurate record drawings reflecting all changes and modifications made during installation and testing of the equipment and systems.
2. Record drawings shall be submitted on reproducible full size prints, with the required number of sets of prints. Once the record drawings are reviewed by the Engineer, the CSI shall incorporate the Engineer's comments, submit required number of sets, and shall submit two copies of the electronic files for each record drawing shall be submitted on compact disks. Files shall be formatted in AutoCAD (.dwg) format. A list of drawing files with corresponding drawing titles shall be provided with the disks. Record drawings shall be provided after conditional acceptance of the facility is approved and shall include all field changes and design modifications made during construction.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-7
1.10 EQUIPMENT INVENTORY, CONFIGURATION, AND VALIDATION
WORKBOOK GENERAL
A. CSI shall populate and maintain an Equipment Inventory, Calibration, and Validation Workbook. This is a single workbook with multiple worksheets. An electronic copy of this Microsoft Excel 2019 workbook is available from the Engineer to the successful bidder.
B. Update the entire workbook biweekly and remit updated copies electronically to the Engineer upon request, which may be as frequent as weekly.
C. Testing and validation results shall be updated electronically in the field using the CSI's laptop computer.
D. Entries on the sample sheet are for illustrative purposes only and do not indicate approved configurations or acceptable equipment.
E. Workbook Contents
1. Instrumentation Calibration Worksheet - Contains calibration and configuration information, including, but not limited to, the equipment designation, equipment description, instrument details, analog output configuration, failsafe configuration, relay output configuration, and technician details. Columns include: Equipment Designation, Equipment Description, Technology, Instrument Details (Manufacturer, Model Line, and Model Number), Analog Output Characteristics, Process Value At Minimum Span, Process Value At Maximum Span, Units Of Measure, Failsafe Mode (Hold Last Good Value, Drive Signal Above 20 mA, Drive Signal Below 4 mA, Failsafe Not Available), Relay Outputs (Purpose and Function), Technician Who Performed Work (Company and Name). The Contractor shall include a five -point calibration check (0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of spanned value). The instrumentation calibration work book shall include all HART parameters (where HART is available for the instrument).
2. Fieldbus Network Configuration Worksheet - Worksheet identifies key configuration information for all networked devices. Columns include:
Equipment Designation, Equipment Description, Equipment Type, Instrument Details (Manufacturer, Model Line, and Model Number), Communication (Protocol; Network Address, ID, or Node; Parameters), Failsafe Mode (Hold Last Good Value, Run or Open, Stop or Close, Other), Technician Who Performed Work (Company and Name).
3. Testing & Validation Worksheet - One worksheet per PLC. Utilizes as-bid PLC I/O list in conjunction with additional 40 columns that correlate to the requirements of three phases of I/O testing by the CSI: Factory Acceptance Testing, Intermediate Point -to-Point Testing, and Final Point -to-Point Testing. A testing work sheet shall include:
a. Name of the signal to be tested.
b. PLC where the signal resides (cabinet, rack, slot and point number).
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-8
c. PLC tag name.
d. Alarm assertion states (high, high-high low, low-low). e. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with each alarm assertion state.
f. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of communications.
g. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of PLC processor.
h. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of field device.
i. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of PLC I/O card.
j. Confirmation of interlock actions associated with loss of power (AC or DC).
k. Confirmation that items are to be visible on HMI and change state. l. Confirmation that items are to be visible on trending (where applicable).
1.11 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) SCHEDULE, PLANS AND FORMS
A. The CSI shall obtain electronic copies of the Equipment Inventory, Configuration, and Validation Workbook from the Engineer and modify electronically to customize testing templates for this project.
B. Submit a testing schedule for Factory Acceptance Tests of panels and associated PLC equipment test programs. The schedule shall list the location of panel fabrication, the location that the test will be conducted at, and the date the test will be conducted. Schedule shall be submitted a minimum of four weeks prior to conducting actual testing. Where revisions to the dates contained in the schedule become necessary, the CSI shall submit revised dates a minimum of seven calendar days prior to conducting actual tests in order to allow the Owner time to plan for witnessing the test. All factory acceptance tests shall be subject to observation by the Owner or designated representative. Shop testing shall be as specified herein.
C. The CSI shall submit a factory acceptance test plan for each control panel indicating all tests and demonstrations to be performed. Factory acceptance test plans shall include line items for verifying all components and wiring in the control panel are appropriately functional, inclusive of all control, instrumentation, network and power devices, cabling and wiring. Devices requiring interaction with field devices may be marked as "field test" and shall be tested during point -to-point testing witnessed by the Engineer.
D. A factory acceptance test report shall be submitted for each panel furnished by the CSI. Test report shall include date and time of test, personnel conducting test, personnel witnessing test, name of panel and fabricator, location of test, test equipment utilized, and a detailed description of the actual tests performed. Reports shall include a list of items that failed the testing, what caused the failure and what Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-9
remedy is to be done. CSI shall also note any additional conditions of the shop test that may be agreed to prior to or during the shop test of any given control panel.
E. All shop testing involving networks shall utilize network addresses provided by the Engineer. Network addresses may be supplied by the Engineer two weeks prior to scheduled testing.
F. The CSI shall develop and provide test programs for the PLC as required to demonstrate functionality of the system hardware components and communications through the system networks. The CSI shall configure, startup, and commission all network managed switches, fiber optic modules, network gateways, and other nodes on the PCS network.
G. If the functional testing conducted at the factory does not meet the previously agreed-to requirements, the Contractor shall absorb all costs for materials, labor and schedule delays required to conduct a re-test of the components or software.
1.12 FIELD TESTING, DEMONSTRATION, AND VALIDATION
A. The CSI shall submit a testing and demonstration plan for the equipment and instrumentation that is furnished and/or modified by the CSI. The plan shall consist of two main components: (1) testing; and (2) demonstration. Both testing and demonstration shall include individual field devices, individual pieces of equipment, and systems.
B. Testing and demonstration of the components, equipment and systems shall include details of staff to be used, testing equipment to be used, listing of equipment and systems to be tested, and a detailed description for testing. Testing shall include final testing of calibrated ranges and actuation settings of instrumentation and field devices, testing of panel mounted controls and control stations, and testing of interlocks, status indication and alarms between panels and systems.
C. The demonstration plan shall be similar to the testing plan in that the same tests shall be performed by the CSI as were performed during testing, for the purposes of demonstrating the operation of the individual pieces of equipment, instrumentation and systems. It shall also serve the purposes of completing a final checkout of the systems. For the purposes of preparing the plan, the CSI shall assume that a minimum of six persons employed by the Owner will be witnessing the tests. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing a minimum of seven calendar days prior to performing demonstration of operation of the equipment and systems.
D. Requirements for testing and demonstration of operation of equipment described herein shall incorporate the requirements for testing and demonstration as specified in the individual Division 40 specification sections.
E. Plan shall include CSI's participation in the unit process and plant-wide testing Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-10
described in Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design-Assist Construction Agreement.
1.13 TRAINING SYLLABUS
A. The CSI shall submit a training syllabus for training the Owner's personnel in the use, function and operation of the panels and control systems. Syllabus shall include equipment to be covered by the training, description of the training to be provided, training aids and materials to be provided, duration of each training evolution, and proposed schedule for training. Training syllabus shall incorporate the training requirements outlined in the individual Division 40 specification sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish equipment, materials and appurtenances in accordance with the requirements of technical specifications listed in Divisions 26 and 40.
B. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers as required to obtain information, submittals, materials and equipment from manufacturers, and shall provide information, submittals, materials and equipment to equipment manufacturers as required to execute the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Source Quality Control
1. The CSI shall conduct shop acceptance tests for control panels and systems prior to shipment. The factory acceptance test shall demonstrate that the equipment performs in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. Each control panel furnished by the CSI shall be assembled and wired so that it functions as a complete system for the factory acceptance test. Inputs to the control panels from field instruments and devices may be simulated during the test. Control panels shall be fully assembled with all devices functional prior to Engineer arriving for shop testing. The Engineer reserves the right to postpone factory acceptance testing if it is deemed that the control panels are not ready to be tested.
3. The FAT shall demonstrate the proper operation of the configuration and control logic of devices described or indicated on the Contract Drawings and specifications.
D. Incidental Discovery of Existing Issues
1. Upon incidental discovery of an existing issue, notify the Owner immediately in writing.
2. Existing issues may include, but are not limited to the following:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-11
a. Code violations.
b. Defective equipment.
c. Compromised equipment.
d. Disabled interlocks.
3.2 FIELD TERMINATIONS AND LABELING
A. Terminations - CSI shall terminate signal wiring to instrumentation, equipment, and field-side of control panel termination strips.
1. Electrical Contractor shall pull conductors and cables to termination points with sufficient excess cable to enable the CSI to label, organize, and terminate each conductor.
2. Terminations shall be limited to signal wiring, 24 VDC and 120 VAC power and control circuits, such as analog signals, discrete signals, fieldbus networks, and control logic, but shall not include 3 phase power or power higher than 120 VAC. Scope of terminations include all equipment.
B. Wire Labeling - Provide labeling of individual conductors terminated by the CSI.
1. Labels shall utilize a common format, appearance, and be installed with consistent and repeatable workmanship.
2. Materials - Labels shall be comprised of a machine -printed polyester or polyvinyl film and utilize black text on a white background. Each label shall be a single adhesive film or shrink wrap tube. Combining multiple labels to comprise a single wire label is not acceptable.
3. Method - Label conductors within 1 inch of each termination. Utilize the same, unique wire designation for the entire continuous segment of wire.
All wire designations shall be a derivative of the equipment's designation to which it is connected.
4. Timeliness - Wires must be labeled prior to termination and equipment may not be commissioned without permanent wire labels in-place. Wire labeling shall be a prerequisite of equipment startup.
C. Nameplates - Provide nameplates for all Division 40 and Division 26 equipment in accordance with nameplate requirements in Section 40 70 00, Instrumentation.
3.3 POINT-TO-POINT FIELD TESTING
A. Definitions
1. Equipment to be Tested - May include a PLC enclosure, control panel, or other device that requires point -to-point testing. It is the assembled panel that requires testing.
2. PLC I/O Lists - Tables located at the end of Section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers, that identify all the signals communicated to each plant PLC.
3. DMM - Digital Multi Meter. Device cable of sensing current in milliamp with a resolution of at least 0.01 mA; sensing continuity; sensing resistance with a resolution of 1 Ohm; and able to source 4 to 20 mA analog signals at Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-12
a minimum of 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans.
4. Signal - Includes a PLC input and output, a hardwired circuit between two field-mounted devices or internal to a control panel, and a network signal like those available over Ethernet and fieldbus protocols.
B. Intermediate Point-To-Point Testing
C. Purpose
1. To identify wires terminated on incorrect terminals, loose wires, wires with insufficient exposed metal or too much exposed metal, improper wiring practices, interference or noise.
2. To prove polarity of analog signals are correct; 4 -20 mA circuits are grounded on one end only; circuits are appropriately powered as 24 VDC loop powered, 24 VDC 3-wire, or 120 VAC powered.
3. To resolve all wiring and equipment issues to ensure that final point -to- point testing proceeds quickly and without interruption so as to conserve the time required by the party witnessing final point-to-point testing.
4. To assess percent complete on Contactor payment applications.
5. To assess readiness of the system for commissioning by the programmer.
D. Scope of Testing
1. All signals specified in the I/O lists.
2. All signals added during the shop drawing and/or construction phases.
3. All fieldbus and Ethernet networks.
4. Prerequisites to commencing intermediate point-to-point testing:
a. Equipment to be tested shall be installed in its final location. b. Equipment to be tested shall be powered by its permanent and final source of power.
c. Field wiring shall be pulled from the field devices to the equipment to be tested and shall be encased in the appropriate conduits. d. Field wiring shall be labeled in the field, as well as inside the equipment to be tested.
e. Field devices are installed, commissioned as specified, powered, and all terminations have been completed.
f. All pending field orders associated with the equipment and workmanship of the systems to be tested shall be resolved. g. All checklists shall be prepopulated by the CSI and their completed form submitted to the Engineer for review and approval.
5. Testing Documentation
a. The CSI shall populate the Testing & Validation worksheet of the EQ Inventory, Configuration, and Validation workbook with all signals to be tested.
b. Update the workbook to identify any testing methods that are not pertinent to the signal as N/A (i.e., Not Applicable).
c. Complete all testing of each signal and identify the person(s) performing the test.
6. Each signal shall be verified by the CSI to ensure that the interconnecting Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-13
wiring is complete and correct, and connected to the proper terminals at the points of termination.
7. Removal of a wire from a termination point within a previously tested circuit nullifies any previous testing of the circuit and necessitates retesting of the circuit following the complete point-to-point testing requirements in its entirety.
8. Method of Testing - In general, each signal shall be tested. a. Discrete Inputs - Manipulate the field element to evoke the signal excitation (change of state) indicative of the wired signal. Signals may jumpered only where it is impossible to evoke signal excitation without damaging or disassembling the field device in a manner not approved by the device manufacturer. For example, equipment shall be started/stopped, floats shall be manipulated, hand switches shall be manipulated, alarm outputs shall be forced at the instrument using self-test features, actuators shall be controlled open and closed using control integral to the actuator, etc. Verify signal excitation in PLC program and on visually PLC discrete input module LEDs. b. Discrete Outputs - Force an output from the PLC program and verify the field device responds as intended. Removal of wires anywhere in the circuit to insert a DMM to verify signal excitation is not an acceptable means of testing for any discrete output. For example, from the PLC program equipment shall be started/stopped, actuators shall be opened/closed, pilot lights shall be illuminated, etc. c. Analog Inputs - For process instrumentation, such as levels, flow meters, pressure, and analytical instrumentation (chlorine residual, pH, etc.), remove one wire of the analog circuit at the field device and use a DMM to source the 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans indicative of the connected field device. For valve actuators and VFDs, use controls integral to the field device to evoke the 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans for the device. In all cases where the process instrument affords such functionality, use the field device's internal signal simulations to evoke the 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans. Verify signal values in the PLC program. Verify signals read positive process values, i.e., verify polarity of signal wires are correct.
d. Analog Outputs - Force an analog output from the PLC program and verify the field device responds as intended. VFDs and chemical feed pumps shall run at the commanded speed, valve actuators and positioners shall modulate to the commanded position, etc. Test at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent spans.
e. Fieldbus Network - Configure all node addresses, field device settings, and fieldbus module settings as appropriate to achieve maximum bandwidth without communication errors. Configure the PLC program to communicate to all nodes and demonstrate monitoring and remote -manual control functionality. For process instrumentation and analytical instrumentation, such as gas Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-14
detection networks, demonstrate monitoring and control of the signals listed on the I/O lists.
f. Ethernet Network - Configure all IP addresses and field device settings, including how the device responds to a loss of signal/communications/ network and loss of power. Configure the PLC program to communicate to all Ethernet devices and
demonstrate monitoring and remote-manual control functionality.
9. Engineer does not need to witness intermediate point-to-point testing. Upon completion of test, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written certification that the test has been completed, and all I/O wiring has been verified as being correct. A copy of the completed checklist shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to scheduling final point-to-point testing.
10. Signals that do not function as specified shall be examined and corrected prior to completion of intermediate point-to-point testing.
11. Intermediate point-to-point testing shall not be considered complete until each signal has been successfully tested and items above are satisfied.
12. Schedule - Upon Engineer's acceptance that the intermediate point-to-point testing has been completed as specified, the CSI shall coordinate with the Owner and Engineer to schedule the Final Point -To-Point Testing.
Scheduling of the final point -to-point testing will not be approved prior to the Engineer's acceptance that the Intermediate point -to-point testing has been completed as specified. Allocate a minimum of 14 calendar days between Engineer's acceptance of the intermediate point -to-point testing documentation and the proposed start date of the final point-to-point testing period.
E. Final Point-To-Point Testing
1. Purpose
a. To verify all signals, instruments, and equipment are functional and completely ready to be commissioned by the programmer.
b. It is expected there are no issues during this testing and that the final point-to-point testing proceeds quickly without interruption. c. To assess percent complete on Contactor payment applications. d. To document when the testing was performed and by whom the testing was performed and witnessed.
e. Successful demonstration thereof shall be a prerequisite for substantial completion for any single system.
F. Scope of Testing
1. All signals specified in the I/O lists.
2. All signals added during the shop drawing and/or construction phases.
3. All fieldbus and Ethernet networks.
4. All signals tested during intermediate point-to-point testing.
5. Prerequisites to Commencing Final Point-To-Point Testing a. Intermediate point-to-point testing has been successfully complete, documented, and documentation reviewed and approved by the Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-15
Engineer.
b. All checklists shall be prepopulated by the CSI and their completed form submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. c. Testing dates and planned sequence of testing has been submitted to Engineer for review, approval, and scheduling.
d. Appropriate equipment vendors, CSI staff, and operations staff are advised and properly coordinated to signals to be demonstrated.
6. Testing Documentation
a. The CSI shall populate the Testing & Validation worksheet of the EQ Inventory, Configuration, and Validation workbook with all signals to be tested.
b. Update the workbook to identify any testing methods that are not pertinent to the signal as N/A (i.e., Not Applicable).
c. Perform testing of each individual signal in the presence of an Engineer's representative, unless the Engineer has waived all or a portion of this requirement in writing.
d. Complete all testing of each signal and identify the person(s) performing the test. Obtain the signature of the Engineer's authorized witness for each signal tested.
7. CSI shall expend all necessary labor required to demonstrate all signals.
8. Removal of a wire from a termination point within a previously tested circuit nullifies any previous testing of the circuit and necessitates retesting of the circuit following the complete point-to-point testing requirements in its entirety.
9. Method of Testing - to be performed as required by the intermediate point- to-point method of testing.
10. Final point -to-point testing shall not be considered complete until each signal has been successfully tested and items above are satisfied.
3.4 PCS PLC TEST PROGRAMS
A. Develop and provide test programs for the PLCs, and network devices internal to the PLC enclosure, as required to demonstrate functionality of the system hardware components and communications through the system networks.
B. Test programs shall provide for the following tests:
1. Factory Acceptance Testing of PLC Cabinets
a. Demonstrate system -wide communications between PLCs, fiber optics, switches, and other network components.
b. Validate control panel wiring from each field wiring terminal block through the I/O modules and PLC.
2. Field Testing of PCS
a. Demonstrate plant-wide communications between PLCs, fiberoptic network, switches, and other network components extending between each PLC cabinets and component on the PCS network. b. Validate field wiring to the PCS control panel from each field device (source) through the I/O modules, PLC, OIT. This shall be included Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-16
for both the intermediate point-to-point wiring verification and final point-to-point wiring and transmission verification testing phases.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
C. Installation
1. The CSI shall provide on -site supervision and advice to the installing contractor to ensure the equipment is installed in accordance with the specifications and the manufacturer's requirements.
2. Control Wiring - Contractor shall include time to install/replace/provide additional control and interlock components and wiring for each starter/VFD assembly or control panel as directed by the Engineer in the field. Modifications shall be performed as required to provide electrical interlocks and interface wiring to obtain a complete and operating control system.
3. CSI shall have two field technicians made available during the testing of equipment to assist with performing wiring and control modifications as required to interface with other field mounted equipment and control panels as directed by the Engineer.
D. Inspections and Field Calibrations
1. Any and all testing equipment required for this project shall be owned by the CSI so as to be immediately available for this project.
2. The use of specific equipment manufacturer's startup, calibration, and troubleshooting personnel to assist the CSI shall be provided.
3. Calibrate instrumentation and place each system into operation. The commissioning of each system shall include the overall calibration and tuning of all control loops and sequences to provide stable control of the process. The validity of all process inputs and outputs for each system shall be checked and corrected during the system commissioning. Final adjustment and calibration shall be performed for all equipment prior to initiation of final testing.
E. System Testing
1. Testing of each panel and/or system shall be scheduled, performed in an orderly sequence, and conducted in the presence of, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Testing shall be conducted for each component and system in accordance with the CSI's submitted plan that has been reviewed by the Engineer.
2. Testing shall include the operation of all hardware, software, process control logic and custom control features. (Testing of process control logic shall only be required for panels and components which have been configured and programmed by the CSI.)
3. Testing requirements described herein shall be performed as specified in the following sections:
a. Section 40 60 00, Instrumentation.
b. Section 40 60 43, Programmable Logic Controller.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-17
4. The following field tests and demonstrations shall be performed for each of the panels:
a. Intermediate point-to-point wiring verification.
b. Final point-to-point wiring and transmission verification. c. Network communications testing and verification.
d. Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design-Assist Construction Agreement
F. Field Testing Requirements
1. Demonstrate the control features of each panel and associated field mounted instrumentation and control equipment, to verify that each panel performs the required control functions and logic as shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified. Control features shall include relay energization, initiation of alarm conditions, resets, interlocks, set point activation, and other functions of the control panels.
2. Equipment shall be field demonstrated to operate satisfactorily in the presence of the Owner, and shall be conducted in accordance with the CSI's testing and demonstration plan that has been reviewed by the Engineer.
Field demonstrations shall be performed after successful installation, calibration and testing of each control panel.
3. In addition to demonstrating the operation of standard control features, special control panel functions shall be demonstrated as specified for each panel as specified below.
4. The Contractor shall provide the necessary test equipment, process media, materials, supplies, and qualified test personnel to perform the field demonstrations as specified herein.
5. Field instrumentation control signals that are required to demonstrate the operation of associated control panels may be simulated upon approval of the Engineer.
6. In the event of failure of the field demonstration, the Contractor shall perform the necessary corrections and re -demonstrate, at his own cost and expense, the equipment as directed by the Engineer.
7. Demonstration requirements described herein shall be performed as specified in the following specification sections:
a. Section 40 60 00, Instrumentation.
b. Section 40 60 43, Programmable Logic Controller.
c. Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design -Assist Construction Agreement
8. Sequence of Testing and Demonstration - The CSI shall perform testing and demonstration in the following sequence:
9. Instrumentation Calibration and Testing - Specified with the respective Division 40 section.
10. Instrumentation Demonstration - Specified with the respective Division 40 section.
11. Wireless I/O testing and verification.
12. Network communications testing and verification.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR 40 61 21-18
13. Intermediate Point-to-Point I/O Wiring Verification - Specified in Section 40 94 43, PLC.
14. Final Point-to-Point I/O Wiring and Transmission Verification - Specified in Section 40 94 43, PLC.
15. Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design-Assist Construction Agreement
G. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the field testing as scheduled required below.
H. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the testing and startup of the facility as scheduled below and as specified in Section 2.16 Tests and Inspections of the Design-Assist Construction Agreement
I. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in the I/O testing as scheduled below.
J. The CSI shall provide competent personnel to participate in startup and validation.
This effort includes, but is not limited to, addressing how instrumentation was setup, terminations made, and identifying and investigating possible issues with wiring and equipment.
1. The CSI shall respond immediately upon notification of an urgent matter, which may result in destruction or damage of a building, piece of equipment, or property.
2. The CSI shall respond within 24 hours to all other matters.
Description
Number of CSI Field
Technicians Required
Factory Acceptance Testing 1
Equipment Installation 2
Instrumentation Calibration and Testing 1
Instrumentation Demonstration 1
Network Communications Testing and
Verification
1 Intermediate Point-to-Point Testing 2
Final Point-to-Point Testing 1
Programming Phase Services 1
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-1
40 63 43
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This specification is procuring two different PLCs. In some cases, there are unique requirements for the individual panels. Where not stated, the requirements are common to both panels. The Contractor shall furnish and install the following PLC enclosures, complete with all necessary accessories and PLC programming software, wired to accommodate all inputs and outputs listed in the input/output (I/O) lists, ready to communicate via the specified medium(s), and ready to be programmed under Section 40 61 21, Control Systems Integrator. In short, this section includes:
1. Programmable logic controllers.
2. PLC power equipment and accessories.
3. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS).
4. Ethernet Switches
5. CAT6 Cabling
6. Surge suppression.
7. DC power supplies.
8. PLC enclosures.
9. PLC communication architecture.
10. PLC I/O lists.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It is a requirement of this specification that all Division 40 specifications be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the entire system performance and compatibility of this section, as well as all other Division 40 specifications.
B. For ease of identification, symbols for the various components of the metering system to be furnished and installed are given in Table 40 63 43-1.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-2
TABLE 40 63 43-1
SCHEDULE OF TYPE I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PLC Nameplate Designation
Nameplate
Designation
Location
City of Roseville PLC PLCFSV02 Northwest corner of the intersection of Five Star Boulevard and Stanford
Ranch Road
TABLE 40 63 43-2
SCHEDULE OF TYPE II PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS
PLC Nameplate Designation
Nameplate
Designation
Location
Placer County Water Agency
PLC
PLCFSV01 Northwest corner of the intersection
of Five Star Boulevard and Stanford
Ranch Road
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:
A. Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals
B. Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.6 Labor and Materials
C. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E. All Division 40 specifications.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NFPA 79 - Labeling.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-3
F. International Society of Automation (ISA) - Standards 5.1 and 5.4.
G. Industry Electric Code (IEC) – Article 1131.3, Programming Standards.
H. [Federal Communication Commission (FCC), Part 15.247.]
I. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 508.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. System Supplier – The party responsible for all of Division 40 specifications.
B. UPS – Uninterruptible power supply.
C. HMI – Human-Machine Interface. Also referred to as Industrial PC or Man- Machine Interface (MMI), is used to facilitate monitoring and/or control between an operator and the process. It contains a Windows-based operator interface which allows the HMI to run any Windows-based programs (i.e., GE iFIX).
D. SCADA Node – A computer with an operating system (OS) that facilitates user interaction with supervisory software as well as other software programs that enable the user to manipulate data and generate reports. SCADA nodes are integral to the PLC network.
E. Client Node – The same as a SCADA node in every way except that client nodes do not have the supervisory software program databases stored on their local hard drives. Client nodes poll SCADA nodes for data and do not function when the SCADA nodes are down.
F. Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) - Used to facilitate monitoring and/or control between an operator and the process but is only designed to run software of the same manufacture as the OIT. It is not capable of running Windows-based programs or other manufacturer software-based packages because it uses a specific proprietary manufacturer operating system.
G. I/O Lists – Table 40 63 43 -3, -4
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings – Submit under Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation. The following submittal material shall be submitted for the Engineer’s review and approval prior to fabrication of any PLC enclosures.
PLCs fabricated prior to the approval of these shop drawings are subject to alteration to conform with the approved shop drawings by the supplier at the supplier’s cost.
1. Submit samples for approval by the Engineer. The Engineer will retain Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-4
samples. Submit samples as follows:
a. A 1-foot sample of a single 16 -gage wire as used to wire discrete I/O within the PLC panel. Wire shall be labeled with the following text on the label:
b. Line 1: “YA-101 to PLCFSV01”
c. Line 2: “123456789”
d. A 1-foot sample of a single 18 -gage T.S.P. as used to wire analog I/O within the PLC panel. Wire shall be labeled with the following text on the label:
e. Line 1: “FI-104 to PLCFSV01”
f. Line 2: “12345678”
g. A 1-foot sample of a single 18 -gage T.S.P. as used to wire analog I/O inside the PLC panel. Wire shall utilize the heat shrink sheath proposed at each termination of such cable.
h. One terminal block with labeling in-place.
i. One machine engraved nameplate used for labeling the PLC enclosure and subpanel devices with text as follows:
j. Line 1: “City of Roseville”
k. Line 2: “Five Star Intertie”
l. Line 3: “PLCFSV02”
m. Submit a 1-foot sample of the proposed Category 6 Ethernet cabling as used between patch panels. Sample shall display labeling technique. Only one sample needs to be submitted in the Engineer's copy of the shop drawings, not one for every shop drawing copy.
Sample will be retained by the Engineer.
2. Using AutoCAD 2016, or higher, provide these drawings for each PLC in the following order. Label all components with manufacturer and complete model numbers on the drawings. Typical drawings are not acceptable.
3. Scaled enclosure layout drawings in 11 -inch by 17 -inch format, detailing locations of all components on the subpanel, door, and all other enclosure faces. Label each view as “Enclosure Door”, “Enclosure Subpanel”, “Enclosure Side”, etc. Drawing shall display layout of completed assemblies, including, but not limited to, PLC backplane, PLC I/O modules, empty slots, radios, UPS, Ethernet switches, auto dialers, terminal blocks, installed spare equipment, power supplies, power line isolators, surge suppression, grounding lugs, wireway, disconnect switches, fuses, control relays, acceptable regions for conduit penetrations of both AC and DC wiring separately, and external power. Illustrate handles, hasps, hinges, and dimensions of exterior-mounted devices. Identify equipment manufacturer and model numbers by placing a number next to the piece of equipment on the drawing and cross-referencing with the Bill of Materials. In addition to the Bill of Materials cross-reference labeling, label PLC I/O modules on the drawing with the manufacturers complete model numbers.
a. Elementary diagram drawings in 11 -inch by 17 -inch format, detailing all enclosure electrical components including, but not limited to, power line isolators, surge suppression, UPS, power Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-5
supplies, fuses, duplex receptacles, indicating lights, ethernet switches, and control relays. Diagrams shall include terminal point designations, line reference numbers, and wire numbers. All wires shall maintain the same wire number for the entire contiguous segment of wire. Diagrams shall illustrate all network cabling and DC and AC electrical distribution. Drawing shall illustrate all available instrument terminations, both used and unused, and be labeled with the manufacturer’s terminal point label as will be found on the installed instrument. Provide a legend on this sheet for all symbols and general notes used on this sheet and on the PLC I/O module detail drawings.
b. Scaled PLC I/O module detail drawings, in 11 -inch by 17 -inch format, for each card installed in the PLC backplane. Detail the wiring of all terminations on the PLC I/O module including, wiring of all I/O points and power. Illustrate all terminations points for each signal including termination points for terminal blocks, relays, etc.
Identify each wires color and wire number. Utilize NFPA 79 standards to illustrate termination points: to an MCC, to a device terminal, to a control panel terminal, to fused blocks, to surge suppressor blocks, etc. Label each point on PLC I/O modules with the PLCs physical address. Utilize NFPA 79 standards for illustration of wiring: internal to the PLC enclosure, outside the PLC panel, and integral to a device. Progression of I/O modules detail drawings shall be in the order of the orientation of the I/O modules in the PLC backplane (e.g., Slots 1 and 2 on sheet 7, Slots 3 and 4 on sheet 8, etc.). Not more than two card details shall be shown on any one drawing. Each I/O module shall be labeled with the installed rack and slot number. Illustrate installed spare I/O modules, but it is not necessary to detail slot filler cards. Each drawing title shall have the following format:
c. Line 1: PLC Name (e.g., “Blower Building, PLC-3”)
d. Line 2: Module Type (e.g., “Discrete Inputs”, “Combo Module: AI, AO, DI, DO”, etc.)
e. Line 3: Installed Rack and Slot (e.g., “Rack 1, Slots 3 and 4”)
1) Label all PLC I/O module termination points and I/O point description as shown on the PLC I/O lists. For I/O list points that lack certain information, create descriptions that are in accordance with ISA Standard 5.1. Each point description shall utilize the following format:
f. Line 1: Equipment Description (e.g., “RWP-1”, “NaOCl Pump No.1”, “Clearwell Level Transmitter”, etc.)
g. Line 2: Signal Description (e.g., “Run Indication”, “Flow Indication”, etc.)
h. Line 3: Signal Functional Designation (e.g., “YI-XXXX”, “FI- XXXX”, where “XXXX” is the instrument loop number.)
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-6
i. Include one AutoCAD drawing of the SCADA system network architecture. Detail all Ethernet switches, fiberoptic cabling, Category 6 cabling, SCADA nodes, printers, modems, radios, antennas, PC Ethernet cards, PLC CPUs, and all other details required to illustrate to the Engineer that the Contractor is proposing a communication network that meets the requirements of the completed system as specified in the Division 40 specifications and on the Contract Drawings. Illustrate location of the detailed equipment in the appropriate buildings and rooms. Label all communication cabling and connector types. Illustrate all communication ports of the equipment as they will be found in the field, including spare and unused ports. Illustrate all DIP-switch and jumper settings.
j. Provide two copies of all the above specified AutoCAD *.dwg files on CD-ROM. Drawing files must be capable of being used by others and saved to the disk in *.dwg format.
4. Submit manufacturer information on all software.
a. Submit calculations to substantiate sizing of each UPS. For each UPS, itemize all equipment drawing from the UPS and compare the respective current and power draws to the manufacturer’s rating of current draw for the specified amount of time.
b. Unless the manufacturer is specifically named in these specifications, the following must be provided along with the manufacturer information for the proposed “or equals”. Provide the following information for a minimum of 20 references for the Engineer to verify 7 of these installations: name and address of the client and location of installation, if different; name of the person in direct responsible charge; consulting design engineer; system programmer; details of the equipment; installation date; startup date; and full performance details. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to provide this information. Include all travel costs for Engineer to visit two of the referenced installations.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual – Submit under provisions of Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
1. Maintenance, troubleshooting, and replacement of PLC cards, racks, CPU, EEPROM, and all associated equipment.
2. All “as built” AutoCAD *.dwg files on CD ROM and 11 -inch by 17-inch printed hardcopies.
3. Warranties – Provide the warranties for the PLC, cards, programming software, operator interface, and all other PLC enclosure equipment in a section entitled “Warranties.” Equipment covered, dates of expiration, contacts and procedures to exercise each warranty, and limitations of warranty shall be explicitly noted. All warranty papers shall be completely filled out by the Contractor with all necessary serial and model numbers.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-7
4. One manufacturer-supplied programming manual for the supplied PLC(s).
5. Include operating instructions for each model Ethernet switch in electronic PDF format on DVD or a USB drive and supply one printed hardcopy.
Document shall provide details on how to configure the switch through the web interface, including IP addresses assignment, steps required to assign a ring master, managing passwords, configuring Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs), and shall also define the Ethernet switch's default configurations, including default username and password to access the web interface.
C. Project Record Documents – Submit under provisions of Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals. The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
1. Revise AutoCAD drawings of individual I/O cards to reflect all scaling.
Coordinate with the PLC programmer for each points scaling.
2. Updated AutoCAD drawings to indicate any changes made during installation or startup of the equipment provided under this section.
3. Updated Bill of Materials reflecting any changes in manufacturers, models, or quantities.
4. Updated Bill of Materials for spare parts supplied.
5. Revise PLC wiring diagrams submitted within the Operation and Maintenance Manual utilizing AutoCAD 201X, or higher, and furnish hard copies within the respective control panels. Provide a USB flash drive to the Owner with approved drawings both in AutoCAD and PDF file formats
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. PLC Manufacturer - Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum 10 years' documented experience, and with authorized service facilities within 250 miles of the project site. Field technicians dispatch sites (i.e., home residences, etc.) do not satiate this distance requirement.
B. System Supplier – Company specializing in the fabrication of control panels incorporating PLCs.
1. System supplier shall have a minimum of five years of experience fabricating industrial and municipal control panels, with a minimum of three projects of equal or greater size as this project.
2. Submit names and telephone numbers for a minimum of three similarly sized projects. Names and telephone numbers shall be for the project end users and design engineers.
3. System supplier shall employ in excess of 25 personnel, including no less than 15 technical staff to include engineers, programmers, and field technicians. Engineer may request documentation to substantiate this requirement.
4. Minimum of one professional engineer in the direct employ of the system supplier.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-8
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor is responsible for all costs associated with shipping.
B. Contractor is responsible for preparing the assembled PLCs and associated equipment for shipping and shipping them to the project site.
C. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Design- Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals, Construction Agreement – 2.6 Labor and Materials and Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
1. Shipping to all locations for all equipment provided under this section shall utilize accelerometer or 3-axis dye packets to indicate whether acceleration or deceleration of three times the force of gravity (3G) has been exceeded.
If acceleration/deceleration has been exceeded, Contractor shall pay for disassembly, damage repair, and reassembly of the shipped units. If any damage is apparent from inspection at time of delivery, Contractor is responsible for all costs involved in disassembly, damage repair, reassembly, and additional shipping back to the manufacturer’s facility if deemed necessary by Engineer. Accelerometers shall be dye packet devices and shall not be reusable or resettable.
D. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.
E. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.
F. Contractor shall provide risk/hazard insurance for property of Owner/Engineer/Contractor for all equipment provided under this section.
1. Insurance shall be in accordance with Supplementary Conditions, Article 5.
G. Submit proof of insurance prior to shipping PLCs. Shop Testing - Systems integrator shall perform shop testing of all PLC panels in the system integrator’s facility prior to shipment of any PLC panels to the job site. Testing shall include:
1. System integrator shall create and install a basic program in the PLC CPU to monitor the status of all physical PLC I/O.
2. Utilize one copy of the Engineer -approved PLC shop drawing I/O module wiring diagrams as a checklist and simulate I/O states on the field instrument connect side of the PLC enclosure terminal strip. To test discrete points, physically make contact closures for all discrete signals. To test analog inputs, utilize a signal generator to drive a three 4 -20 mA input signal, 4mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA. To test analog outputs, write three analog outputs in the basic PLC program and verify the signal using a digital multimeter, using 4 mA, 12 mA, and 20 mA as write values.
3. Document testing by marking up each point on the shop drawing. Supply Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-9
the marked-up shop drawing to the Engineer for approval before panel shipment.
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish manufacturer's, or designated authorized representative’s, service and maintenance for PLCs a minimum of two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide Owner with a toll-free phone number for technical information and assistance on the PLC and system programming or reimburse Owner for calls made due to system maintenance, debug, tuning, etc. requirement during the two- year warranty period.
C. PLC Equipment Replacement During Construction – Contractor shall replace PLC components when directed to do so by the programmer. Contractor shall provide all costs necessary to return components that are suspect of damage to the manufacturer for testing and are responsible for returning repaired modules and reinstalling in place of the temporary replacement module. When available, temporary replacement modules may be taken from uninstalled spare inventory.
When the required temporary replacement modules are not available in the uninstalled spare inventory, Contractor shall obtain the necessary temporary replacement module(s) within 48 hours of directive by the programmer.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the compatibility of the power supplies and PLC cards with the new instrumentation, existing systems, and equipment. Coordination shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Power supplies provide powered equipment with adequate voltage and amperage according to the connecting equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Refer to Contract Drawings for designations and verify with Owner.
C. Coordinate PLC panel shop testing demonstration with the Owner and Engineer.
Request for demonstration date shall be in writing no less than two weeks in advance of the proposed date.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. One licensed hardcopy of each Windows-based on-line and off-line programming software (development), on DVD, used by the system integrator for programming the PLCs contained within this contract. If an incorrect copy is supplied, the CSI is responsible for providing a complete licensed copy on a single manufacturer- issued DVD. Software downloads are not acceptable. PLC programming software provided to the Owner shall be the latest version at the time of system Substantial Completion. Software shall be IEC 1131-3 compliant and include both ladder Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-10
logic and Function Block Diagram editors. One-year technical support contract with the software manufacturer. Software shall be supplied to the Engineer with the first revision of the PLC shop drawings.
B. Cable, software drivers, network cards, and other devices as required by PLC manufacturer to communicate from the PCI slots of each computer with the communication ports of PLCs provided by the system integrator.
C. Cable, software drivers, and other devices as required by setpoint station manufacturer to communicate from the serial port of a PC-compatible computer with the programming ports of setpoint stations provided by the system integrator of this project.
1.12 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the following uninstalled spare parts that are identical to and interchangeable with the original parts. Spare parts shall be furnished in clearly identified containers, protected in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
1. One (1) spare CPU for each CPU type.
2. One (1) spare PLC power supply of each type used.
3. One (1) EEPROM/SD Card with final, debugged program stored on it for each PLC.
4. One (1) of each type of discrete input module.
5. One (1) of each type of discrete output module.
6. One (1) of each type of analog input module.
7. One (1) of each type of analog output module.
8. One (1) spare 24 VDC power supply of each type used.
9. Twenty-Five (25) terminal blocks.
10. One (1) Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) device as used to protect the incoming power to the PLC panel.
11. Two (2) of each type of surge suppression device as used to protect incoming analog signals.
12. Two (2) of each type of surge suppression device as used to protect incoming discrete signals.
13. Ten (10) spare fuses of each type used for each control panel. Each control panel shall receive 10 spare fuses for each type used. Provide fuses in labeled containers and mount in each control panel.
14. One (1) spare antenna TVSS.
15. One (1) spare radio for each type provided.
16. One (1) spare DIN-rail mounted Ethernet switch for each model provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PLC MANUFACTURERS
A. For PLCs listed in Table 40 63 43-1, provide the following type PLCs:
1. Modicon, Model M340
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-11
B. For PLCs listed in Table 40 63 43-2, provide the following type PLCs:
1. Allen-Bradley, Model: CompactLogix 5069-L306ER with 5069 I/O preferred.
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
A. General Description
1. Programmable controller manufactured to NEMA ICS 3 with component circuit boards manufactured to NEMA ICS 2.
2. Rack-mounted design. Modular.
3. Provide all terminal blocks, wiring arms.
4. Ability to program through an IBM compatible computer.
5. Provide all power supplies, cabling, surge protection, input/output (I/O) racks, extensions, and ladder logic program to accommodate required I/O and system control as specified in previous sections.
6. Programmable with software by the same manufacturer in strict accordance with IEC 1131-3 standards.
B. Configuration
1. Processor Unit - Include processor, power supply, EEPROM memory, input/output modules, and special modules required to communicate with other PLCs and other equipment designated to communicate digitally with the PLCs.
2. PLC Module Capacity (for PLCs listed in Table 17100-1) a. Backplanes or I/O racks shall have a minimum of 10 slots and the capability to support any I/O configuration utilizing all slots. b. Provide a minimum of two spare slots.
c. Provide covers for empty slots.
C. Table 40 63 43-1 PLC CPUs
1. Memory Size - Minimum 16K of logic memory.
2. Processing Speed – Final program scan time shall not exceed 5 milliseconds in any one PLC. In PLCs where the scan time exceeds this requirement, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Reserve Memory – Final program shall not exceed 65 percent of the available CPU program capacity. In PLCs where the program occupies more than this amount, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. CPU microprocessor shall be by Intel, AMD, or Motorola.
5. Each CPU shall be able to address a minimum of 2,048 I/O points. Provide quantities of CPUs as recommended by the manufacturer for the quantities of I/O points for each PLC provided.
6. CPU shall have a minimum of one communication port for 10Base T Ethernet and one serial communication ports for programming and interface with setpoint stations. Minimum speed of the serial communication ports shall be 19,200 BPS. Ethernet port shall provide 10 MBS data transfer to the network, hence intermediary communication adapters that reduce this Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-12
data transfer rate are not acceptable.
D. Table 40 63 43-2 PLC CPUs
1. Memory Size - Minimum 8K of logic memory, 512K RAM, minimum.
2. Processing Speed – Final program scan time shall not exceed 5 milliseconds in any one PLC. In PLCs where the scan time exceeds this requirement, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Reserve Memory – Final program shall not exceed 65 percent of the available CPU program capacity. In PLCs where the program occupies more than this amount, the CPU shall be replaced with a larger CPU at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. CPU microprocessor shall be by Intel, AMD, or Motorola.
5. Each CPU shall be able to address a minimum of 2048 I/O points. Provide quantities of CPUs as recommended by the manufacturer for the quantities of I/O points for each PLC provided.
6. CPU shall have a minimum of one communication port for EthernetIP and one serial communication ports for programming and interface with setpoint stations. Minimum speed of the serial communication ports shall be 19,200 BPS.
7. Provide communication adapter modules as necessary to communicate with cellular modems, HMIs, and other equipment as necessary to achieve specified system architecture.
8. Provide Time of Day (TOD) clock option adapters.
E. Input/Output Units
1. PLC
a. All I/O modules for PLCs shall be of the same form -factor as the PLC CPU and shall plug into the PLC backplane (rack).
b. Use discrete I/O modules with a minimum of 8 and a maximum of 16 points each, 24VDC or 120VAC as required by I/O lists. Discrete outputs shall be isolated. All discrete input modules shall have the same number of points. All discrete output modules shall have the same number of points.
c. Use analog I/O cards with a maximum of 8 channels per card. Use voltage, current, or other analog arrangements as required by I/O lists. Analog I/O shall have minimum 12 -bit resolution. All analog inputs and outputs shall be isolated. All analog modules shall have the same number of points.
d. Combination I/O modules are not acceptable.
2. Installed Spare I/O - Provide the following installed spare I/O above the quantities listed in the I/O list:
a. Provide a minimum of four discrete inputs at each PLC. b. Provide a minimum of four discrete outputs at each PLC. c. Provide a minimum of two analog inputs at each PLC.
d. Provide a minimum of two analog outputs at each PLC. e. Wire all installed spare points to terminal strips. These terminal blocks do not count toward installed spare terminal blocks.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-13
f. Discrete outputs shall be isolated using an interposing relay. Provide relays for used and installed spare discrete outputs.
g. In PLC enclosures where signal isolators are used to isolate analog inputs or analog outputs, provide signal isolators for each installed spare analog I/O point.
3. Refer to I/O list for I/O points for each PLC enclosure. a. All I/O shall be wired to terminal strips. Where relays, intrinsically safe barriers and/or surge protection for I/O are required, wiring shall be from the I/O module to the relay, barrier, or surge protector to the terminal strip.
b. Provide intrinsically safe barriers for I/O originating in hazardous areas as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Installation and separation of wiring shall be in full accordance with the latest revision of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
c. Provide surge protection in accordance with Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation. Surge protection shall be located on a separate DIN-rail from the terminal strips.
d. Provide loop and external power supplies for all field devices that require such power.
e. Provide 120 VAC power for all 120 VAC discrete outputs. f. Provide 24 VDC power for all discrete inputs.
2.3 FIREWALL/ETHERNET SWITCHES (DIN-RAIL MOUNTED)
A. PLC’s found in Table 40 63 43-1 shall utilize the following Ethernet Switches:
1. General
a. Provide DIN -rail mounted Fast Firewall/Ethernet switches for mounting in PLC enclosures as identified on the SCADA
Architecture diagram.
b. Provide quantities of switches in each location shown in the SCADA Architecture diagram as necessary to achieve the total quantity of fiber and copper Ethernet ports required. Provide the quantities of fiber and copper ports illustrated on the SCADA Architecture Diagram, with the following minimum: maintain 100-percent spare ports in each enclosure with a minimum of two (2) unused ports in each Ethernet switch and/or expansion module.
c. For compatibility with existing Fiber network, no or equals will be accepted. For PLCs listed in Table 17100 -1, provide the following type Firewall/Ethernet Switch:
1) Manufacturers shall be:
a) Palo Alto, PA-220r
d. Specifications
1) Software Layer 3 Enhanced with Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping enabled.
2) Light source optimized to function with 50 micron/125 micron (core/cladding diameter) fiber optic cabling with duplex SC connectors.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-14
e. Fiber optic link budget (loss) no greater than 8.0 dB at 1300- nanometers over 0 to 5,000 meters.
1) DIN-rail mounted, fanless design.
2) Manufacturer-rated for industrial use, including
temperatures of 0 to 60 degrees C, humidity 10 to 95 percent non-condensing, and an Mean Time Between Failures
(MTBE) manufacturer rating greater than 40 years.
3) IEC 60068 -2-27 conformity for shock. Capable of
withstanding 18 shocks at 15 g of 11 ms in duration.
4) IEC 60068-2-6 conformity for vibration.
5) EN 61000-4 conformity for immunity to electro-magnetic interference (EMI).
6) Support 256 virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).
7) Device throughput shall be 10/100/1000 GB.
8) Removable terminal blocks with screw compression.
9) Capable of being powered from redundant/dual DC power supply sources.
10) LEDs for Link and Activity per port. Failure LED for switch. 11) Capable of supporting a self -healing, fiber optic ring structure with a reconfiguration time less than 0.3 seconds. 12) Device configuration and monitoring shall be achieved through a web -browser interface via the Ethernet TCP/IP protocol. The device shall include an embedded web server to access configuration and status pages. Ethernet switches that utilize separate configuration software packages are not acceptable.
13) One Form C relay output contact, user -configurable to indicate start -up failure, a broken ring segment, or other warning events.
B. PLC’s found in Table 40 63 43-2 shall utilize the following Ethernet Switches:
1. General
a. Provide DIN-rail mounted Fast Ethernet switches for mounting in PLC enclosures as identified on the SCADA Architecture diagram. b. Provide quantities of switches in each location shown in the SCADA Architecture diagram as necessary to achieve the total quantity of fiber and copper Ethernet ports required. Provide the quantities of fiber and copper ports illustrated on the SCADA Architecture Diagram, with the following minimum: maintain 100-percent spare ports in each enclosure with a minimum of two (2) unused ports in each Ethernet switch and/or expansion module.
c. Specifications
1) Software Layer 2 Enhanced with Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) snooping enabled.
2) Light source optimized to function with 50 micron/125 micron (core/cladding diameter) fiber optic cabling with duplex SC connectors.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-15
3) Fiber optic link budget (loss) no greater than 8.0 dB at 1300- nanometers over 0 to 5,000 meters.
4) DIN-rail mounted, fanless design.
5) Manufacturer-rated for industrial use, including
temperatures of 0 to 60 degrees C, humidity 10 to 95 percent non-condensing, and a Mean Time Between Failures
(MTBE) manufacturer rating greater than 40 years.
6) IEC 60068 -2-27 conformity for shock. Capable of
withstanding 18 shocks at 15 g of 11 ms in duration.
7) IEC 60068-2-6 conformity for vibration.
8) EN 61000-4 conformity for immunity to electro-magnetic interference (EMI).
9) Support 256 virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs).
10) Device throughput shall be 10/100/1000 GB.
11) Removable terminal blocks with screw compression.
12) Capable of being powered from redundant/dual DC power supply sources.
13) LEDs for Link and Activity per port. Failure LED for switch. 14) Capable of supporting a self -healing, fiber optic ring structure with a reconfiguration time less than 0.3 seconds. 15) Device configuration and monitoring shall be achieved through a web -browser interface via the Ethernet TCP/IP protocol. The device shall include an embedded web server to access configuration and status pages. Ethernet switches that utilize separate configuration software packages are not acceptable.
16) One Form C relay output contact, user -configurable to indicate start -up failure, a broken ring segment, or other warning events.
d. Manufacturers shall be:
1) Allen-Bradley, Stratix 8000 Series.
2) Cisco, IE-4000 Series.
3) N-Tron equipment is not acceptable.
e. PCWA requires Stratix only.
f. Completely compatible and optimized by the CSI for use with the supplied PLC CPU’s and other networked equipment.
C. Warranties – Lifetime limited warranty on all Firewall/Ethernet switches
2.4 RADIO EQUIPMENT
A. Provide DIN-rail mounted cellular radios for mounting in PLC enclosures as identified on the SCADA Architecture diagram.
B. Provide quantities of cellular radios in each location shown in the SCADA Architecture diagram.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-16
C. Manufacturer – GE MDS Orbit ECR Cellular Modem
D. Cellular radio shall be installed and configured by the contractor. After the procurement of the cellular radio, contractor shall program the radio’s configuration for a 4G cellular network and inclusion of the PCWA existing cellular network. Coordinate IP addressing and network information with Owner/Engineer. If the system provided is to be used for spread spectrum radio.
Incorporate the following wording.
2.5 ANTENNAS
A. General Description – Provide antennas, and associated appurtenances, at each location as shown on the Contract Drawings. The PCWA PLC shall communicate via a cellular radio sending and receiving signals with the assistance of an antenna.
B. System supplier shall provide an antenna for each PLC as required to achieve the overall communications requirements of the system (refer to PLC communication system quality requirements). Antennas shall be puck style antenna and mounted such that a strong signal strength is achieved. Mounted antennas shall be of all aluminum construction and rated to withstand at least 100 MPH winds with 0.5- inch radial ice.
C. Antennas shall be attached to existing structures, such as control panels, buildings, and client owned poles unless existing structures or poles are not available, in which case the Contractor shall provide poles to mount antennas.
Particular attention shall be given to the correct installation of the antennas to give adequate protection from nearby lightning strikes.
D. System supplier shall provide all mounting masts, or poles, as required to support the antennas at the elevations (not to exceed 20 feet from the top of structure unless justified to the Engineer) and orientations required. Masts and poles shall be suitable for outdoor environmental conditions, provide adequate support and protection for transmission lines and be provided complete with all necessary mounting accessories.
E. Provide TVSS at the input of the antenna cabling to the PLC.
2.6 CATEGORY 6 ETHERNET CABLING
A. Furnish and install Ethernet cabling in conduit to connect networked PLCs, computers, industrial workstations, and wall-mounted Ethernet jacks to the networked Ethernet switches as shown in the Contract Drawings and in accordance with the project documents.
B. Specifications
1. Four-pair, 24 AWG cable. 100 percent overall foil shield bonded to jacket inner wall. Braided drain wire.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-17
2. PVC jacket sequentially marked at 2-foot intervals.
3. Bonded pairs.
4. Color coded as follows: White with blue stripe, blue, white with orange stripe, orange, white with green stripe, green, white with brown strip, brown. White conductors must be striped.
5. Allowable pulling tension of 45 lbs.
6. Broadcasting quality of 270 Mbps, minimum.
7. In accordance with the TIA/EIA 568-B.2 Category 6 standard.
8. RJ-45 compatible.
9. Input impedance of 100 +15 ohms up to 100 MHz.
10. Documented and certified performance up to 300 MHz.
11. Sunlight and oil-resistant PVC jacket. Color Blue.
12. Manufactured by Belden, DataTuff, or equal.
2.7 ETHERNET ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all necessary cabling including, but not limited to, switch uplink cabling, patch cords, network modem Category 6 Ethernet cabling, and power cords in lengths as necessary to locate equipment as specified and directed by the Engineer.
2.8 STRATEGIC WIRING OF I/O
A. Wiring of I/O shall be planned such that the failure of any single PLC I/O module minimally affects an overall process. The following guidelines shall be adhered to:
1. Control outputs for multiple pumps of similar purpose shall be distributed across separate PLC output modules.
2. Where redundant monitoring is designed, such as redundant level transmitters, the signals shall be located on separate I/O modules.
3. For system components that are distributed across multiple modules, the wiring location on the PLC I/O module shall be consistent for that signal across each of the I/O modules over which similar equipment is distributed.
To illustrate, if Pump 1’s run indication is wired to Input 1 on module 5, then Pump 2 and Pump 3’s run indication shall also be wired to Input 1 on their respective input modules.
4. It is understood that the above strategic I/O wiring requirements will result in the use of additional modules with installed spares that are not necessarily in contiguous ranges.
5. Relocate I/O points as directed by the Engineer through the shop drawing reviews.
2.9 ENCLOSURE
A. All PLC enclosures shall be appropriately sized to accommodate all I/O modules, power supplies, communication equipment, etc. as specified within this section and as necessary to perform the required functions.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-18
B. Free-standing, NEMA 4X enclosures.
C. Reserve space within the enclosure for the future provision of two, 10-slot racks.
D. Control Panel Shelf: PLC cabinet enclosures shall be provided with retractable shelf for temporary use of laptop programming terminals on the inside of the panel door.
E. A large print pocket shall be provided on interior face of the enclosure door(s). Where this cannot be accommodated due to windows and other control devices mounted on the door, the print pockets shall be mounted on the interior side of the control panels.
F. Enclosure doors shall be equipped with intrusion switches and 2-hour intrusion bypass spring timers. Intrusion switches shall be wired to discrete inputs at the respective PLC for intrusion monitoring.
G. PLC enclosures shall not utilize auto-locking doors.
H. PLC enclosures and associated components shall be in full accordance with Section 40 96 20 - Control Panels.
I. Maximum footprint for PLC enclosures shall be 36 inches wide by 60 inches tall by 16 inches deep or as otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings.
J. PLCs shall be mounted 42 inches to 60 inches above finished floor within the enclosure.
K. Refer to Electrical Contract Drawings for locations and space available for PLCs.
L. Each enclosure shall have two ground busses, one for instrumentation cable shields and enclosure grounding and one for signal grounding.
M. Provide grounding lugs for connection to the external grounding system.
N. Provide a Ground Fault Circuit Interruptor (GFCI), 15-amp duplex receptacle in each PLC enclosure. To be used as a service outlet with both outlets available.
O. Provide pad-lockable three-point latching, gasketed, keyed locking handles. All PLC enclosures shall utilize the same cylinder lock and keys. Provide two keys per enclosure.
P. Provide an LED light package in each enclosure. LED light shall utilize a manual light switch and terminal block. Light shall not energize automatically when door is opened. Light shall be Hoffman, Model LEDA1S35, or equal. Provide one centered light within each door opening, i.e., one door requires one light, two doors require two lights, etc.
Q. Provide DIN-rail mounted utility boxes in each enclosure to store all supplied uninstalled spare fuses and LEDs. Box shall be ITC/bordcase Model 799-103, Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-19
Weidmuller Model 7914760001, or equal.
R. Provide breather and drain vents located and mounted within each enclosure in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Utilize Stahlin Model BV4XKIT breather vent and model DV4XKIT drain vent.
S. Terminal Blocks
1. Terminal blocks shall be DIN-rail mounted compression-screw type.
2. Label via machine printed zack strips as supplied by the terminal block manufacturer. Zack strips shall be plastic labels specifically designed for the supplied terminal block. Zack strips shall be capable of being separated to label stand-alone terminal block, if necessary.
3. Screwless terminal blocks are not acceptable.
4. Provide installed spare terminal blocks to accommodate wiring of PLC I/O modules provided in empty slots. Of the remaining empty slots, estimate half will be 8 -point analog cards and half will be 16 -point discrete cards.
Mount installed spare terminal blocks in a contiguous strip next to the utilized discrete input, output, analog input, or output strips.
5. For discrete I/O, utilize single tier terminal blocks (Phoenix Contact, Model UK 5N, or equal). For analog I/O, utilize double tier terminal blocks with grounding foot (Phoenix Contact, Model SLKK 5, or equal).
T. Fuse Blocks
1. Provide individual fuses for each PLC module.
2. Fuse blocks shall utilize slow or fast blow glass fuses as appropriate for the protected device.
3. Fuse block shall have an LED that illuminates when the fuse has blown.
4. Label via machine printed zack strips as supplied by the fuse block manufacturer. Zack strips shall be plastic labels specifically designed for the supplied fuse block. Zack strips shall be capable of being separated to label stand-alone fuse block, if necessary.
5. Provide installed spare fuse blocks to accommodate wiring of additional PLC I/O modules. Estimate as is done for terminal blocks.
6. Fuse block manufacturer shall be Phoenix Contact, model UK5 -HESI, or equal.
U. Relays
1. Provide relays for all discrete outputs.
2. Characteristics - Plug-in, spade terminal style with pilot light and retainer clip. All relays shall be DPDT rated 10A, minimum. DIN-rail mount relays.
3. Manufacturer shall be Square D, Type KU, or equal.
V. Wireway
1. Provide covers for all wireway.
2. For all stand-alone enclosures, provide 3-inch width wireway, minimum.
3. Size width and depth based on 50 percent of area fill. Check the applicable codes to verify fill.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-20
W. Enclosure Nameplates – Provide the following machine engraved nameplates permanently affixed to the front door of each PLC enclosure:
1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) – Calculate and display SCCR per UL508A Supplement SB. Contractor shall establish the SCCR of individual, relevant power circuit components; apply current limiting components to modify the SCCR in a portion of a circuit in the panel; and determine the overall SCCR of the panel. Submit itemized SCCR calculations with PLC shop drawings. On the nameplate, identify:
a. The panel builder company name and address.
b. Main supply voltage, phase, and frequency.
c. Electrical power full load current, largest motor FLA, and SCCR. d. Enclosure type rating.
e. The lighting panel name (i.e., LP-1) and circuit breaker position (i.e., CB-15).
2. Enclosure Nameplate – Nameplate as required by Table 40 63 43-1.
X. Install pertinent final I/O lists, elementary diagrams, and PLC card wiring diagrams in the enclosure of each PLC provided under this Contract. Drawings shall be laminated and bound via a plastic zip strip through a metallic grommet in the upper left-hand corner of each drawing.
2.10 PLC HIGH-SPEED PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (PLC
NETWORK)
A. General
1. Communication shall be through TCP/IP and Ethernet.
2. Minimum data communication speed shall be 10 Megabits per second (mbps).
3. PLC network topology shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings.
B. Fiberoptic PLC Network
1. PLC network shall consist of, but not be limited to, the following materials and equipment, which shall be compatible with the PLCs provided by the SCADA system supplier:
a. Ethernet switches.
b. Fiberoptic cabling.
c. Fiberoptic cable connectors.
d. Category 6 cable and associated appurtenances.
2. Fiberoptic Cable – Refer to Section 40 66 33, Fiber Optic Communication Systems.
2.11 PLC ACCESSORIES
A. 24 VDC Power Supply
1. Provide a sufficient quantity of 24 VDC power supplies as necessary to power PLC equipment and instrumentation connected to the PLC.
2. Power supplies shall be manufactured by PULS, Phoenix Contact, Allen- Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-21
Bradley, or equal. Power supplies shall meet, or exceed, the following requirements.
a. UL 508 listed, CE approved.
b. DIN-rail mounted.
c. Removable, pluggable connections for input and output power. d. Local output status indication light.
e. Overload Protection - Current limited to a preset value. f. 89 percent efficient.
g. Output Voltage - 24 VDC +5 percent adjustable.
h. Temperature Range - -20 to 50 degrees C.
i. Mean lifetime of 500,000 hours.
j. Two-year warranty.
k. Ripple and Noise - 24 mV RMS, 200-mV peak to peak.
l. Accept input voltages of both 120 VAC and 240 VAC.
m. Fully enclosed, touch-safe.
n. Integral LEDs indicating DC Power ON.
3. Power supplies shall be supplied in redundant pairs, with each pair provided with a redundancy module of the same manufacturer as the power supplies and specifically designed for use as a redundancy module for the furnished power supplies. Redundancy module shall accept two independent inputs and provide one power source output. Redundancy module shall automatically decouple the standby power supply to remove the load from the standby power supply when the primary power supply is operational and functioning properly. Redundancy module shall provide dry contact outputs indicating the health of each power supply. The redundancy module shall have integral LEDs indicating the status of each power supply. Transition of power between the primary and standby power supply shall not affect continuity of power to any of the supplied loads.
B. I/O Signal Surge Suppressors
1. Provide I/O surge suppression for all discrete and analog signals terminating or originating out of doors or in other buildings and as specified in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
2. PLC TVSS – Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV)- based surge suppression with an active tracking filter.
a. Provide one power protection device for each PLC enclosure. b. Manufacturer – Emerson Network Power, Model Islatrol IE; or equal.
c. Minimum of 160 Joules protection between line-neutral, line- ground, and neutral-ground for a total of 480 Joules protection. d. Response Time – Less than 1 nanosecond (in Normal mode). e. 40kOhm surge capability on a 8x20 microsecond waveform. f. UL1449 listed for safety and performance.
g. Manufactured by an ISO 9001 company.
h. Load side sine wave tracking circuitry.
i. Arrays of MOVs shall be located directly on the load side terminals and line side terminals to minimize response time.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-22
j. Enclosure – Sand packed or epoxy filled.
2.12 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
A. Characteristics
1. Provide one Online Double Conversion UPS for each PLC. Line Interactive, Offline-Standby, Double Conversion On Demand, and Ferro -resonant technologies are not acceptable.
2. Minimum Watt Capacity - See paragraph 2.11.C below.
3. Minimum Volt-ampere Capacity - See paragraph 2.11.C below.
4. Four 120 volt, 5-15R, output receptacles, minimum.
5. Alarms - Battery backup operation, low run time remaining, and overload.
6. Automatic current and over-voltage output protection.
7. Operating Input Voltage - 99 VAC - 138 VAC.
8. No interruption (no transfer time for normal power to battery backup) of power to the PLC system.
9. Efficiency - 95 percent.
10. Brownout protection for input voltages of 88 VAC without the use of the batteries.
11. Lightning and Surge Protection - ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Categories A and B with 0.3 to 0.7 percent.
12. Radio Frequency Noise Isolation - 38 dB common mode, 47 dB normal mode.
13. Power Reserve Time at Full Power Draw - One hour, minimum. See paragraph 2.11.C below for power draw requirements. SCADA system supplier shall submit calculations to substantiate sizing.
14. Manufacturer – APC Smart-UPS Online SKU-SMT1500C
B. PLC power supply shall be backed up by the UPS. The required capacity of the UPS shall be determined by the load requirements of the PLC and its peripherals.
As a minimum, the UPS shall maintain power to the entire panel, all communication devices and modules, all relays, all loop power supplies, all indicators, the PLC, and all PLC I/O that is powered from the panel, setpoint station, but not the heating/cooling system for the panel.
C. It is preferred that the UPS be located in the same enclosure as the PLC, unless panel size or cooling requirements make it impractical. In that case, it shall be located on a wall shelf located above the PLC enclosure. Shelf shall be provided by the Contractor.
2.13 ENCLOSURE SUN SHIELDS
A. General – Enclosure sun shield plates shall be fabricated by the contractor using 316 SS and installed on standoffs on the top, south side, and west side of each PLC enclosure. Fabricated plate width and height shall span the entire length of the top and/or side of the enclosure to fully protect the enclosure.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-23
B. Sun shield color shall be coordinated with and approved by the owner. Submit the color to be used as part of the shop drawing submittal.
2.14 INTERNAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A. Characteristics
1. Provide one wall mount temperature sensor for each PLC enclosure.
Provide all mounting, power supplies and cable needed to connect the sensor to an analog input card on the PLC.
2. The temperature range shall be 0 to 135 degrees F.
3. The output shall be 4-20 mA.
4. The input power shall be 24 Vdc.
B. Manufacturer – OMEGA EWS-TX or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
E. Verify grounding of system.
3.2 PANEL FABRICATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Wire Labeling
1. All wiring shall be labeled within 1.0-inch of stripped sheathing.
2. Wire label text shall be visible in its installed location without manual manipulation.
3. Wire shall carry the same wire number for an entire contiguous segment.
4. Wires shall be labeled via machine -generated print on polyester or polyvinyl film.
5. In the event that labels begin to fall off or text begins to smudge, or otherwise begin to become illegible, within one year of panel delivery to the site, the Contractor shall remove all labels within the panel with new labels at the Contractor’s own expense. In this case, the Engineer must approve replacement labels.
C. Device Labeling - All subpanel-mounted devices shall be labeled.
1. Devices that do not require external power (24 VDC or 120 VAC) shall be Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-24
labeled via machine -generated print on polyester or polyvinyl film. Print shall not be capable of being washed off, smudged, or erased. Labeled components include, but are not limited to, individual terminal blocks, control relays, individual fuses, individual I/O surge suppressors, and grounding bars.
2. Devices that require 24 VDC external power or 120 VAC shall be labeled via machine engraved plastic nameplates utilizing white text on black background. Nameplates shall be secured to the subpanel via permanent adhesives. Labeled components include, but are not limited to, disconnect switches, TVSS, power supplies, PLC backplanes, circuit breakers, DIN - rail strips, radios, Ethernet switches, UPSs, and convenience receptacles.
3. Exemptions – Individual PLC I/O modules only.
D. Supplier-Fabricated Cabling – All cabling fabricated by the panel fabricator
3.3 SHOP TESTING
A. To verify that all PLCs are ready for system programming, the system’s integrator shall perform the following shop testing prior to shipment to the site:
1. Perform a test configuration on all PLC modules to verify that all PLC CPUs communicate with the associated I/O modules, including inter-rack communication.
2. Install the UPS, and power supplies, simulate all device outputs to the PLC, and verify that the signals are read properly at the PLC. As part of the testing of the UPS, fully charge the UPS battery and disconnect line power from the UPS and verify that:
a. “Power Loss” is sensed by the PLC when line power is disconnected.
b. Verify that when the UPS battery low that “Low UPS Battery” is sensed by the UPS.
c. Record the time it takes for the UPS battery to completely drain from full charge once line power is disconnected from the PLC panel.
3. Point test all PLC I/O to verify that all I/O modules are correctly wired to the terminal strips and that the PLC I/O modules function properly. Testing shall be performed between terminal points on the I/O module to the terminal strip the electrician will terminate field wiring to.
4. Leave all configuration programs in the PLC CPU.
5. Perform testing to verify that the Ethernet communication between the PLCs is in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
B. After all testing has been successfully completed, contact the Engineer to schedule an in-shop inspection by the Engineer. Contractor shall have the personnel that performed the testing present to perform random verification of the tests performed by the integrator.
C. Submit a written report to the Engineer prior to scheduling Engineer’s in-shop inspection.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-25
D. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and a qualified engineer to properly perform all tests required.
E. FAT shall not be approved and authorized for shipment from the fabricator’s facility until PLC wiring diagrams are updated to reflect “As Fabricated” conditions and marked “As Built.”
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. These services only apply to PLC’s found in Table 17100-2. City of Roseville will provide the configuration and startup serves of the Palo Alto PA-220r in the City of Roseville PLC Panel.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. PCWA will provide the configuration and startup services of the PCWA’s PLC, Network Switch, and Radio.
D. All electrical work performed in fabrication and installation of PLC systems shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Division 16 Electrical Specifications.
E. Contractor is responsible for aligning all antennas and testing communication strength in the field.
F. Assemble and configure all switches and locate equipment within the plant in locations as shown on the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
G. Terminate Category 6 cabling in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B pin/pair assignments for 100-Ohm balanced twisted pair cabling (T568B), as follows:
1. Pin 1 - White with Orange Stripe.
2. Pin 2 - Orange Solid.
3. Pin 3 - White with Green Stripe.
4. Pin 4 - Blue Solid.
5. Pin 5 - White with Blue Stripe.
6. Pin 6 - Green Solid.
7. Pin 7 - White with Brown Stripe.
8. Pin 8 - Brown Solid.
H. Ethernet Switch Configuration - Include on-site time for a factory-trained, manufacturer's representative to configure Ethernet switches listed in Table 40 63 43-4 as follows. Configuration of the Palo Alto Firewall/Ethernet Switch shall be done by the City of Roseville.
1. Program IP addresses into each switch using IP addresses supplied by the Owner/Engineer.
2. Configure parameters appropriate for an industrial control network including, but not limited to, enabling IGMP snooping and QoS.
3. Configure Ethernet switches to function in a self-healing, redundant ring Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-26
architecture.
4. Advise Engineer of parameters available for the Ethernet switch's integral relay output contact and program as selected by the Engineer.
5. Assist in troubleshooting network issues at the request of the Engineer.
6. Configure managed Ethernet switches - Coordinate configuration of managed switch properties with the Engineer via shop drawings. Schedule a meeting with the Engineer prior to in-field switch configuration to review switch configuration parameters and discuss intended managed switch function. Switch configuration shall occur before any Ethernet devices are put into service. Perform site visits for switch configuration to meet the sequence of construction. Switch configuration may include: routing, development of up to three Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs), configuration of IP addresses, traffic management, rules, and setup of switch management software of multiple computers. Contractor shall take the lead on researching, collecting, and presenting all available configuration options.
I. Install cables in the raceway systems. Inspect raceways prior to pulling in cables.
Rod and swab out conduits and ducts prior to installing cables. Notify the Engineer of any conditions, which would prevent installation of the specified cables, in writing before proceeding with the installation.
J. Provide adequate put-up lengths on cable reels to make termination-to- termination runs without splices. Spliced cables are not acceptable.
K. Support cables in riser conduits at intervals as required by NEC and cable manufacturer.
L. Installation tools and materials shall be approved by the cable manufacturer.
M. Reroute and reorganize network cabinet cable routing and equipment layout as requested by the Engineer in the field.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Label each termination point on each end of the Category 6 cable with machine- printed, Mylar permanent-adhesive stickers. For example, each cable shall be labeled as "PLC-3/Port 6,” "PLC-3A/Port 2,” "Superintendent's Office Jack 1/Port 3,” etc.
B. Tag each cable in junction boxes.
C. Check cables and wires for proper identification numbering and color-coding.
3.6 CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Upon receipt of Category 6 reels, perform pre-installation ("on the reel") measurements to verify attenuation, length and continuity. Record the results of Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-27
all measurements and submit to the engineer. Cables that fail continuity or that have higher than specified attenuation shall be subject to rejection and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Make the following tests after cable installation:
1. Upon completion of the cable installation, perform 100 percent bi - directional end -to-end loss testing of cable runs between each port and switch.
2. The calculated and measured values of the end to end shall be in accordance with Category 6 standards. In the event that any differences are in excess, implement troubleshooting techniques and methods to provide agreement.
If the discrepancies cannot be reconciled, the cable installation shall be removed, replaced, and retested at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
CONTROLLERS (PLC) 40 63 43-28
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1 of 1 printed 4/16/2024 \\ghdnet\ghd\US\San Francisco\Projects\561\11231367\Tech\Instrumentation\Five Star IO list 100%.xlsx Project: Five-Star Intertie Improvements Project
Client: Placer County Water Agency
Cabinet Location: Intersection of 5-Star Blvd.
Cabinet Designation: PLCFSV01
Table 40 63 43-3
GHD:11231367
Item No. Equipment Item Equipment
Designation Description Function
Designation
Input or
Output I/O Type Electrical
Characteristic
In/Out
Building? Remarks
6010
Pressure Relief Valve Vault
Pressure Reducing Valve
PRV Upstream Pressure
PRV Downstream Pressure
Sump Level High
PRV Vault Hatch Open
PRV-6010
Position Indication
Position Indication
ZI
ZC
Input
Output
Analog
Analog
4-20mA
4-20mA
Out
Out
6020
6030
6080
PIT-6020
PIT-6030
LSH-6080
Pressure Indication
Pressure Indication
Level High
PI
PI
LSH
Input
Input
Input
Analog
Analog
Discrete
4-20mA
4-20mA
24 VDC
Out
Out
Out
Pressure Transmitter
Pressure Transmitter
Set float above normal operating range of sump
pump.
6050 ZSH-6050 Hatch Open YIO Input Discrete 24 VDC Out
6040
Flow Meter Valve Vault
Five Start Intertie Flow
Meter Vault Hatch Open
FIT/FE-6040
Flow Indication
Totalizer Pulse
FI
FQI
Input
Input
Analog
Discrete
4-20 mA
24 VDC
Out
Out
6060 ZSH-6060 Hatch Open YIO Input Discrete 24 VDC Out
6090
Sump Pump
Sump Pump Run Status
PMP-1
Run Status
YI
Input
Discrete
24 VDC
Out
6010
6020
6030
6080
6040
6040
6050
6060
To City of Roseville PLC Panel
Pressure Reducing Valve Position
PRV Upstream Pressure
PRV Downstream Pressure
PRV Vault Sump Level High
Five Start Intertie Flow
PRV Vault Hatch Open
Meter Vault Hatch Open
PRV-6010
PIT-6020
PIT-6030
LSH-6080
FIT/FE-6040
ZSH-6050
ZSH-6060
Position Indication
Pressure Indication
Pressure Indication
Level High
Flow Indication
Totalizer Pulse
Hatch Open
Hatch Open
ZI
PI
PI
LSH
FI
FQI
YIO
YIO
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Analog
Analog
Analog
Discrete
Analog
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
4-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
24 VDC
4-20 mA
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
6070 Communication Heartbeat Heartbeat Pulse YS Output Discrete 24 VDC Out Pulsed output to verify communications between the PLCs is working.
6090
6091
6092
PLC Status
Panel AC Power Loss
Primary DC Power Supply Failure
Secondary DC Power Supply Failure
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Failure
PLC Cabinet Internal Temperature
Control Panel Open
AC Power Loss
Failure Indication
Failure Indication
JAA
JDA
JDA
Input
Input
Input
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
In
In
In
6093 UPS Fault YAF Input Discrete 24 VDC In
6094
6095
Temperature Indication
Open Indication
TI
YIO
Input
Input
Analog
Discrete
4-20 mA
24 VDC
In
In
1 of 1 printed 4/16/2024 \\ghdnet\ghd\US\San Francisco\Projects\561\11231367\Tech\Instrumentation\Five Star IO list 100%.xlsx Project: Five-Star Intertie Improvements Project
Client: City of Roseville
Cabinet Location: Intersection of 5 -Star Blvd.
Cabinet Designation: PLCFSV02
Table 40 63 43 -4
GHD:11231367
Item No. Equipment Item Equipment
Designation Description Function
Designation
Input or
Output I/O Type Electrical
Characteristic
In/Out
Building? Remarks
6010
6020
6030
6080
6040
6040
6050
6060
From PCWA PLC Panel
Pressure Reducing Valve Position
PRV Upstream Pressure
PRV Downstream Pressure
PRV Vault Sump Level High
Five Start Intertie Flow
PRV Vault Hatch Open
Meter Vault Hatch Open
PRV-6010
PIT-6020
PIT-6030
LSH-6080
FIT/FE-6040
ZSH-6050
ZSH-6060
Position Indication
Pressure Indication
Pressure Indication
Level High
Flow Indication
Totalizer Pulse
Hatch Open
Hatch Open
ZI
PI
PI
LSH
FI
FQI
YIO
YIO
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Analog
Analog
Analog
Discrete
Analog
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
4-20mA
4-20mA
4-20mA
24 VDC
4-20 mA
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
Out
6050 Communication Heartbeat
Heartbeat Pulse YS Input Discrete 24 VDC Out Pulsed output to verify communications between the PLCs is working.
6090
6091
6092
PLC Status
Panel AC Power Loss
Primary DC Power Supply Failure
Secondary DC Power Supply Failure
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Failure
PLC Cabinet Internal Temperature
Control Panel Open
AC Power Loss
Failure Indication
Failure Indication
JAA
JDA
JDA
Input
Input
Input
Discrete
Discrete
Discrete
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
In
In
In
6093 UPS Fault YAF Input Discrete 24 VDC In
6094
6095
Temperature Indication
Open Indication
TI
YIO
Input
Input
Analog
Discrete
4-20 mA
24 VDC
In
In
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PLC CONTROL STRATEGY
40 64 00-1
SECTION 40 64 00
PLC CONTROL STRATEGY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Control summaries for the following system components:
Five Star Intertie
B. This section is for reference only, there are no requirements for the Contractor.
1.02 FIVE STAR INTERTIE
A. Description
The Five Star Intertie (FSI) provides treated water from PCWA to the City of Roseville. The FSI is programmed to maintain PRV Downstream Pressure. The Pressure Reducing Valve (PRV) at FSI will modulate open or closed to provide a given water pressure. The PCWA PLC will be used to control the PRV and provide status and alarms for the Agency Staff. The City of Roseville’s PLC will only provide status and alarms.
The FSI consists of the following valves:
1) PRV6010 –10” Valve
The estimated maximum flow would be about 2500 to 3000 GPM.
A minimum flow rate of 35 gpm must be met in order to open PRV6010.
PRV6010 should not be operated below these flow rates.
B. PRV Operation
Normal Operation
Under normal operation the PRV6010 will modulate open or close to maintain the operator settable desired pressure.
An operator will have a settable deadband set around the desired pressure setpoint. When the Downstream Pressure (PIT6030) is within the deadband the valve will not open or close. If pressure increases or decreases the valve will open or close (PRV6010) accordingly to achieve the desired Downstream Pressure (PIT6030).
Loss of Communications
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PLC CONTROL STRATEGY
40 64 00-2
1) Loss of communications to FSI will result in a call out alarm and PRV6010 will continue to locally operate to the last known value.
Manual Operation
2) The PRV6010 can also be run in manual mode by selection PRV6010_MANUAL. To run in manual mode, system
operators via SCADA would:
a) Open the inlet valve PRV6010.
b) Set the position of the valve PRV6010 to an open
percentage in order to achieve the desired pressure.
C. Devices, Alarms, and Interlocks
Valve PRV6010
1) Set Emergency closure speed to close valve in 90 seconds from full flow to closed.
Pressure Indicating Transmitter PI6020
2) Indicates the line pressure upstream of Valve PRV6010 Valve ZI6010
3) Indicates the valve position of Valve PRV6010.
Pressure Indicating Transmitter PI6030
4) Indicates the line pressure downstream of Valve PRV6010 Flow Meter FE6040
5) Measure flow from PCWA to City of Roseville. Alarms at flows lower than 35 GPM.
Limit Switch ZSH6050
6) Indicates whether vault hatch is open or closed.
Float Limit Switch LSH6080
7) Indicates high water level in PRV Vault.
Float Switch ZSH6060
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
PLC CONTROL STRATEGY
40 64 00-3
8) Indicates high water level in Flow Meter Vault.
Sump Pump YI6090
9) Indicates running status of PMP1.
D. Related Documents
Five Star Intertie Improvement Project P&ID Record Drawings (I-102)
E. Devices, Alarms, and Interlocks
Five Star Intertie Improvement Project P&ID Record Drawings (I-102)
F. Recording
The following data will be recorded for use by operations.
1) Flow rate to the raw water pipeline (gpm)
2) Total volume to the raw water pipeline (gpm)
3) Sump pump run time.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-1
SECTION 40 66 33
FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install fiber optic cables and appurtenances necessary for the plant's networks to communicate as specified in the Division 40 specifications and as shown on the SCADA architecture sheets of the Contract Drawings.
B. Equipment and labor specified in this specification section shall be supplied and installed by a single manufacturer that has sole responsibility for the function of the fiber optic system and its final performance.
1.2. RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 33 – Utilities
B. Section 26 - Electrical
C. All Division 40 specifications
1.3. REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 70.
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1. UL 1581 VW-1; Vertical Tray Cable Flame Test.
2. UL 1666 Riser Cable.
C. IEEE Standard 383-1974 Flame Retardancy.
D. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001, Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling.
E. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull points and pull box sizing.
F. ISO/IEC 11801 - Type OM3 fiber
G. IEC 60793-2-10 - Type A1a.2 fiber
1.4. DEFINITIONS
A. Attenuation - The decrease in magnitude of transmission signal strength between points, expressed as the ratio of output to input.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-2
B. Bandwidth - A range of frequencies, specifically the difference between the upper and lower limits of the range, expressed in Hz.
C. Loss - Attenuation of the optical signal, measured in dB.
D. Numerical Aperture - the light-gathering ability of a fiber. The maximum angle to the fiber axis at which light will be accepted and propagated through the fiber.
E. Plenum - A designated area used for transport of environmental air as part of the air distribution system. Because it is part of the air distribution system, cables installed in this spare require a higher fire rating (i.e., plenum rated).
F. Bend Radius - Maximum radius that a cable can be bent to avoid physical or electrical damage or cause adverse transmission performance.
G. OTDR - Optical Time Domain Reflectometer.
H. Cable Support System - A combination of conduits, cable trays, support hooks, tie wraps, and/or any other hardware pieces used in a cabling installation to support cables.
I. Terminate/Termination - Termination of fiber includes provision of connectors on individual fibers, also referred to as "tipped." Termination of fiber optic cables includes provision of a breakout kit and installation of connectors on individual fibers.
J. SCADA Architecture Diagram - Contract drawing illustrating the project's network architecture. Identifies relative routing between fiber consumers. Actual routing and lengths shall be determined using ductbank schedules and through coordination with the General Contractor.
K. Channel - Two fibers are required for one channel of communication, which is comprised of a transmit and receive fiber.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Submit per Design Assist Construction Agreement section 2.15.
The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
1. Cable pulling plan that specifies the sequence of work tasks, materials and equipment used, and a schedule for the work. AutoCAD 2016 or later drawings illustrating all runs of fiber, patch panels, network cabinets, transition from jacked cable to individual fibers, Ethernet switches, and PLCs.
2. Proposed test equipment to be used including OTDR and power meter, including make and model number. Detail the exact procedure that will be utilized to test cable reels once they are delivered to the site. Separately detail the procedure that will be utilized to test installed cables.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-3
3. Link Loss Budget Analysis - Calculated point-to-point (transmit point to receive point) optical power loss of each optical fiber using proposed installed cable lengths. Include all losses through LC connectors and patch panels. Submit calculated values including sketches graphically showing the proposed cable route, distances, itemized losses, and locations of terminations. After testing installed network, these calculated values shall be compared with end-to-end measured values.
4. Submit a 1-foot sample of the proposed fiber optic equipment to be provided as follows: fiber optic cable with breakout kit, tipped, and a single fiber adapter panel with type *LC connectors. Sample shall display labeling technique. Only one sample need be submitted in the Engineer's copy of the shop drawings, not one for every shop drawing copy. Sample may be tested, and will be retained, by the Engineer.
B. Project Record Documents - The following submittal requirements are to complement the requirements and format set forth in Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
1. Comparison of as-installed (tested) losses to calculated losses. Include cable end-to-end and node-to-node (transmit to receive) test data.
1.6. COORDINATION
A. Take the lead on coordinating switch and fiber operation and installation requirements with other suppliers of Ethernet-based equipment that will be utilizing fiber throughout this project. Utilize the SCADA architecture diagram to identify fiber consumers. Coordinate with the General Contractor to obtain contact information for these fiber consumers.
B. Coordinate spacing of spools in fiber optic patch panel with fiber optic cable and fiber optic patch cord manufacturer recommendations for installed bending radii.
C. Coordinate with electrician for mounting locations for fiber optic patch panels.
D. Coordinate space mounting requirements to minimize fiber optic jumper cable lengths. Locate fiber patch panel to maintain shortest possible fiber optic jumper cable lengths. Limit distance of separation to 15-feet of jumper cable length.
1.7. SPARES
A. Provide one preterminated/tipped and tested spare fiber optic jumper cable for each installed fiber optic jumper cable. Provide a rigid case to accommodate all uninstalled spare fiber optic jumpers.
B. Provide one fiber adapter panel (FAP) with type LC connectors for each type used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-4
2.1. FIBER OPTIC CABLE
A. Manufacturer
1. Corning, Model Altos
B. General
1. Provide single-mode optical glass fiber cores compatible with LED-based transmission systems and the Ethernet switches supplied under Sections 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controller, suitable for both Fiber Optic Inter-Repeater Link and Fiber Distributed Data Interface networks.
2. All-plastic fiber-core construction is not acceptable.
3. Provide in continuous (without termination) lengths as required to connect Ethernet devices in locations shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. Fiber Optic Cable
1. Heavy duty, tight-buffered or gel-filled construction with additional strength members, PVC inner jacket, and oil, water, and chemical resistant, UV stabilized, flame retardant, polyethylene outer jacket, designed for indoor/outdoor application and direct burial.
2. Cable Specifications
a. Fiber Size - 50 micron/125 micron (core/cladding diameter). b. Fiber Count – Six fibers (minimum).
c. Maximum Short-Term Tensile Load - 300 lb.
d. Maximum Long-Term Tensile Load - 180 lbs.
e. Crush Resistance - 80 pounds per square inch.
f. Operating Temperature - -40 to +50 degrees C.
g. Fibers shall have the following optical properties:
1) Maximum attenuation at 850 nm wavelength - 2.5 dB/km. 2) Maximum attenuation at 1300 nm wavelength - 0.8 dB/km. 3) Minimum bandwidth at 850 nm wavelength - 1500
MHz/km.
4) Minimum bandwidth at 1300 nm wavelength - 500
MHz/km.
5) Numerical aperture - 0.250 + 0.015.
2.2. FIBER TIPS/FIBER CONNECTORS
A. Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Fiberoptic Module Transceivers
1. Provide quantities of fiberoptic SFP modules as required to facilitate the fiberoptic architecture illustrated in the SCADA Architecture Diagram on the Contract Drawings.
2. SFP Specializations
3. Utilize LC connections.
4. In the supplied architecture, with the supplied fiberoptic cabling, Ethernet switches, and SFP’s, the system shall support a bandwidth of 1.0GB up to 550 meters.
5. Wavelength – 850 nm.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-5
6. Core Size/Cladding Size – 50/125 microns.
7. Model Bandwidth – 500 MHz/km. Supported Distance at Maximum Rated Bandwidth 550 meters (1,804 feet).
8. Connector Loss (typical) - 1 dB.
9. Durability (mating cycles) - 1000 (minimum).
10. Repeatability - Less than 0.2 dB.
11. Operating Temperature - -40 to +80 degrees C.
12. For compatibility with existing Fiber network, no or equals will be accepted. For equipment listed in Table 40 63 43-1, provide the following SFP Fiberoptic Module Transceiver:
a. Palo Alto, Model PAN-SFP-LX
B. All fibers, including unused fibers, shall be terminated/tipped. Provide flexible vinyl protectors for terminal connectors to prevent damage to terminal connector ends.
2.3. FIBER PATCH PANELS
A. Provide fiber optic patch panels in quantities as required by the SCADA architecture diagram. For compatibility with the existing fiber network, no or equals will be accepted.
B. Manufacturers shall be:
1. Dispance, Model SNAP-12LC-SM
2. Corning, Model SPH-01P
C. Characteristics
1. Wall-mounted, all metal construction enclosure in color Black.
2. Separate doors for service side and user side compartments with keyed locks.
3. Supply fiber optic cable routing kit, including grommets, cable ties, spools, strain relief bracket and ID/caution labels.
4. RoHS compliant.
5. Spools must be spaced to accommodate fiber optic cable and fiber optic patch cord minimum installed bending radii.
D. Provide FAPs by the same manufacturer as the fiber patch panel and of model designed specifically for the supplied patch panel.
1. FAPs shall screw into place, compression fittings are not acceptable.
2. Each FAP shall have a sufficient quantity of connectors to accommodate the quantity of cables shown on the SCADA architecture diagram.
E. Coordinate space mounting requirements to minimize fiber optic jumper cable lengths. Locate fiber patch panel to maintain shortest possible fiber optic jumper cable lengths. Limit distance of separation to 15 feet of jumper cable length.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-6
F. Provide preterminated and tested duplex fiber optic jumper cables for each fiber in the fiber optic cable. Jumpers shall be of sufficient length to interconnect the patch panel to the Ethernet switch or fiber optic media.
2.4. FIBER OPTIC JUMPER CABLES
A. Provide fiber optic jumper cables in accordance with the following requirements:
1. A single jumper cable shall be comprised of two fibers suitable for transmit and receive with LC connectors at both ends. Fiber sheaths shall be bonded the entire length of the jumper cable.
2. Provide one jumper cable for each pair of fibers in the fiber optic cable.
For both used and unused channels. These quantities do not count as uninstalled spares.
3. 50 micron/125 micron (core/cladding diameter) fiber.
4. Suitable for use with the supplied fiber optic cable.
5. Lengths as required to interconnect fiber optic patch panels to the fiber switches shown on the SCADA architecture diagram.
6. Provide rubber boots for each spare fiber's connector protecting the exposed glass fiber light emitting tip from damage.
2.5. ETHERNET SWITCHES
A. Refer to Section 40 63 43, Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)
2.6. ACCESSORIES
A. Provide breakout kits on fiber optic cable prior to fiber terminations. Kits shall be secured to the jacketed cable and separate and support each fiber as it exits the jacketed cable. Provide protective sheathing for individual fibers after the breakout kit. Additional protective sheathing shall provide adequate rigidity to prevent bending the individual fibers beyond their minimum bending radius.
Individual fibers shall not be visible before or after the breakout kit.
B. Each fiber exiting the breakout kit shall be insulated in a protective rubber sheath.
Bare fibers are not acceptable anywhere within the fiber network.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-7
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. GENERAL
A. Install cable and connectors as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified in this section.
1. Install connectors on all fibers in each cable.
B. Provide all material, equipment, and labor to install the fiber optic cables as indicated and as specified.
C. Perform work in accordance with the National Electrical Code, terminal connector manufacturer, and cable manufacturer requirements.
D. Perform work in accordance with the cable manufacturer recommendations and pertinent sections of ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568- 2001 shall be referred to in defining work performed in a "neat and workmanlike" manner. Conformance to all pertinent sections of ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 is required, the following are highlights from ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 that will be inspected:
1. Cable support system planning, documentation, and sequence of installation.
2. Minimum separation distances from possible sources of EMI.
3. Section 4, Pulling Cable.
3.2. INSTALLATION
A. Install cables in the conduit. Inspect conduit prior to pulling in cables. Rod and swab out conduits and ducts prior to installing cables. Notify the Engineer of any conditions, which would prevent installation of the specified cables, in writing before proceeding with the installation.
B. Fiber to be fusion spliced in the City of Roseville’s existing Coyote splice enclosure that is located in the sidewalk pull box, as indicated in the Contract Drawings. Only 1 pair of fibers is to be spliced into the existing City splice box.
Remaining spare fibers shall be tipped and safely coiled for future use.
C. Adhere to ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A for maximum length of conduit and bends between pull points and pull box sizing. No one conduit segment shall be more than 100 feet in length with no more than two 90-degree bends allowed in one segment.
D. Install armor jacketed multi-fiber cables in underground ducts. Armor jacketed multi-fiber cables may also be used in conduit systems provided inside buildings and structures.
E. Premise cables may also be installed in the conduit systems provided inside buildings and structures.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-8
F. Lubricate cables during installation. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's specifications for tensile strength and bending radius.
G. Label cables and reels prior to pulling cable into place.
H. Provide breakout kits, termination and patch panels, pigtails, and jumpers as required to install a complete network as indicated. Termination panels shall be wall or rack mounted. Do not mount termination panels in manholes or outside of buildings or structures.
I. Provide adequate put-up lengths on cable reels to make termination-to- termination runs without splices. Spliced cables are not acceptable.
J. Support cables in riser conduits at intervals as required by NEC and cable manufacturer.
K. Installation tools and materials shall be approved by the cable manufacturer.
3.3. IDENTIFICATION
A. Cables - Label cable in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606, which details specific label format for identification of where cable originates and terminates.
B. Individual Fibers - Label each termination point on each end of the fiber including spares. Each fiber shall be labeled as "PLC 1/Fiber 1," "PLC-1/Fiber 2," "PLC- 1/Fiber 3,” "PLC 1/Spare 1," etc.
C. Tag each cable in junction boxes, patch panels, manholes, and anywhere else fiber optic cabling may be accessed further than 10 feet from termination.
3.4. CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Upon receipt of fiber optic cable reels at the site, perform pre-installation ("on the reel") OTDR measurements on each strand of optical fiber to verify attenuation, length and continuity. The optical fiber shall be tested using a multimode OTDR at 850-nm wavelength. Record the results of all measurements and submit to the Engineer within one week after cable delivery to the site. Cable reels that fail continuity or that have higher than specified attenuation (greater than 3 dB) shall be subject to rejection and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Make the following tests after cable installation:
1. Visually inspect terminations for out-of-round condition and surface defects such as micro-chips and cracks using a 200x inspection microscope.
2. Upon completion of the cable installation, including all connectors, perform 100 percent bi-directional end-to-end loss testing on each optical fiber. The multimode fiber shall be tested using Light Emitting Diode Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-9
(LED) sources (insertion loss test set and power meter) operating at 850 nm wavelength.
3. The calculated and measured values of the end to end shall vary by no more than +0.75 dB. End-to-end losses shall not exceed 3 dB. In the event that any differences are in excess, implement troubleshooting techniques and methods to provide agreement. If the discrepancies cannot be reconciled, the cable installation shall be removed, replaced, and retested at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Verify proper identification numbering and color coding on cables and fibers.
D. Install, test, and service equipment as necessary to accommodate the sequence of construction.
E. Perform an additional four visits of on-site testing of fiber with OTDR test equipment at the request of the Engineer to assist in the troubleshooting of network issues as necessary to eliminate the fiber as the source of potential network issues.
3.5. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING
A. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.
B. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall be given to the Engineer and Owner at least two weeks in advance.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024
FIBER OPTIC
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 40 66 33-10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-1
40 71 13
FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1. SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready to operate, the magnetic-type flow metering equipment, complete with flow transmitters and all necessary accessories, in compliance with the following specifications and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It is a requirement of this specification that the elements of the system be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the equipment and services specified in this section, as well as all other Division 40 specifications.
B. For ease of identification, designations for the various components of the metering systems to be furnished and installed are given in the following table.
TABLE 40 71 13-1
SCHEDULE OF MAGNETIC FLOW METERING EQUIPMENT
Nameplate Designation
Flow
Transmitter/
Element Flow
Designation
Size
Liner
Material
Flow
Range
(gpm)
Intertie Flow FIT/FE-101 10-inch Ebonite or
PTFE
245-5161
1.3. RELATED SECTIONS
The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:
A. Section 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings
B. Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
C. All Division 40 specifications
All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 26, Electrical Specifications.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-2
1.4. REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. ISO 9001
F. National Institute of Science and Technology (NIST) - Calibration method.
1.5. SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - Submit per Design Assist Construction Agreement section 2.15
1. Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation, for shop drawing format and content.
2. Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation, for operation and maintenance manual format and content.
3. NIST calibration certificates for each flow meter.
4. Baseline Smart Meter Verification (SMV) parameters.
5. Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation, for project record documents format and content.
1.6. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
B. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.
C. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.
1.7. DEFINITIONS
A. Smart Meter Verification (SMV) – Term used herein to define a feature of the supplied transmitters that automatically validates flow tube electronics are within specification to the manufactured specifications, thereby validating the flow monitoring system (flow tube plus flow transmitter) are properly calibrated.
1.8. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS
A. A. Transmitter and flow tube shall be manufactured by, and at, an ISO 9001 company/facility.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-3
1.9. WARRANTY
A. Provide a two-year warranty for flow meters covering the entire unit including the electronics and the flow tube.
1.10. COORDINATION
A. Contractor is responsible to verify with the supplier that the appropriate ratings and options are provided for each application, taking into account area classification, flow, passing media, temperature, and vacuum limitations. Any such deviation from that which is specified shall be brought to the engineers' attention during shop drawing submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. MANUFACTURERS
A. The flow metering equipment manufacturer and model shall be the following or equal:
1. Where Ebonite or Teflon liners are required by Table 40 71 13-1:
a. Siemens 5100W flow tube
Siemens MAG 5000 flow transmitter
2.2. EQUIPMENT DESIGN
A. Flow Elements
1. Flow elements shall be magnetic flow tubes, low frequency electromagnetic induction type and shall produce a 4-20 mA output linear to liquid flow rate.
2. The flow tubes shall have ANSI Class 150 flanged ends. Wafer-style flow tubes are not acceptable.
3. The flow tube housing shall be carbon steel ASTM A 105.
4. Flow tubes shall be lined as required by Table 40 71 13-1.
5. Electrodes shall be conical-shaped (bullet nose) and shall be Hastelloy C.
Substantiate compatibility with media monitored in the shop drawing submittal.
6. The flow tube housing shall be splash-proof and weather-resistant. It shall be capable of accidental submergence in up to 30 feet of water for up to 48 hours without damage to the electronics or interruption of the flow measurement.
7. Empty Pipe Detection - Flow tube shall measure the conductivity between the electrodes to monitor for an empty pipe condition. Upon detection of an empty pipe condition, the flow transmitter shall indicate the pipe is empty on the main transmitter display and drive the flow signal to zero.
8. Flow tubes shall be NSF approved for installation in drinking water applications.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-4
B. Flow Transmitters - The electronics portion of the magnetic flow meters shall include both a magnet driver to power the magnet coils and a signal converter.
1. Flow transmitter shall be installed in the PCWA PLC enclosure (PLCFSV01).
2. Terminal strips for electrical connections shall be supplied. Housing shall not need to be opened to make adjustments.
3. Transmitter (Converter) Electronic Characteristics
a. The electronics shall be of the solid state, feedback type and utilize integrated circuitry.
b. The input span of the signal converter shall be continuously adjustable between 0 to 1 and 0 to 31 fps and the range adjustment shall be direct reading.
c. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the meter system to eliminate the need to zero adjust the system with a full pipe at zero flow.
d. The converter shall not be affected by quadrature noise nor shall it require zero adjustment or special tools for startup.
e. Input and output signals shall be fully isolated.
f. The converter output shall be 4 to 20 mAdc into 800 ohms. g. The electronics shall be designed for operation on 120 VAC +10 percent, 60 Hz +5 percent.
h. The converter shall also include:
1) Integral zero return based upon a user-adjustable
percentage of flow meter span. Setpoint shall be adjustable 0 to 10 percent.
2) Direct adjustment of scaling factor in engineering units. 3) Integral calibration self-test feature to verify proper operation at the electronics.
4) Local direct reading indicator calibrated in gallons per minute or million gallons per day as directed by the
Engineer. Flow totalizer with manual reset.
i. Each meter shall be hydraulically calibrated to the specified flow range in a NIST-certified facility.
j. Smart Meter Verification (SMV) – Each meter shall be equipped with an integral software feature that continuously validates the flow monitoring system (flowtube plus flow transmitter) are holding calibration. The utility shall run automatically without the need for manual initiation and shall provide simple “Pass/Fail” indication on the flow transmitter’s integral display. The display shall display quantitative values that are presented alongside the baseline values recorded when the instrument originally went online. Refer to testing requirements herein.
C. Performance Requirements
1. The equipment furnished shall measure, indicate, and transmit flow rates to within +0.5 percent of actual flow from a flow velocity of 1.0 to 31 fps.
Refer to Table 17400-1 for flow ranges for each meter.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-5
2. Accuracy shall not be affected by changes in percent solids or changes in fluid density, temperature, or viscosity. Accuracy shall not be affected by the presence of air bubbles to a greater extent than the fluid volume represented by such air bubbles.
3. Maximum power consumption for each flow element shall be 15 watts.
4. Equipment design specifications shall be considered as an integral part of the performance requirements.
2.3. ACCESSORIES
A. Nameplates - Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation. Wording of nameplate shall be as specified in Table 40 71 13-1.
B. Mounting Hardware - Provide stainless steel mounting hardware as necessary to mount equipment in locations as described in the Contract Documents.
C. Cabling - Provide power, and signal, cable and conduit to locate transmitters in locations listed in Table 40 71 13-1 and the Contract Documents according to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
D. Lightning and Surge Protection - Provide lightning and surge protection for the equipment listed in Table 40 71 13-1 in accordance with Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
E. Flow tubes shall be provided with grounding rings on each flange. Grounding electrodes or straps are not an acceptable alternative. Materials of construction shall Type 316L stainless steel, Hastelloy C or Zirconium as chemically compatible with the measured media.
F. Spool Pieces - Provide one spool piece for each flow tube provided.
G. Portable secondary calibrator for checking calibration of the magnetic flow meters shall be provided. The unit shall have an adjustable setting to simulate signal output for a given flow velocity from 0 to 99.99 ft/sec. This unit is not required for flow meters with calibration checking integral to the transmitters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. Install all equipment furnished under this section in compliance with division 33 - Utilities
3.2. SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Installation - Include 1/2 day of a manufacturer-approved field technician's time to verify proper mounting of equipment.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-6
B. Final Acceptance - Include 1/2 day of a manufacturer-approved field technician's time to test equipment to demonstrate that:
1. Flow metering systems have been properly installed, properly calibrated, and are functioning as specified.
2. Grounding rings are installed, grounded to the flow tube, and the flow tube grounded to the building's grounding grid or a proper ground in the termination control panel where the flow rate signal is wired. Grounding to the pipe is not acceptable.
3. Flow metering systems indicate the correct flow rate for three different rates of flow in the appropriate discharge line.
4. Integral zero return is configured to eliminate erroneous readings.
5. Calibrated span of the flow meter's 4-20 mA output is visible manufacturer's nameplate of the flow tube.
6. Configuration and setpoints are not lost upon power loss. This shall be tested by disconnecting the transmitter from power for 30 minutes.
7. Flow Totalizer Pulse – Configure the transmitter to generate a pulse every unit of gallons. Unit of gallons shall be configured such that a pulse is not generated any more frequently than every 2 seconds under maximum flow conditions.
C. Smart Meter Verification (SMV) – Include a return visit for a manufacturer- approved field technician’s time to utilize each flowmeter’s integral SMV utility to identify, record, and set the baseline metrics utilized by the SMV utility.
Identification of the baseline parameters utilized by the SMV utility shall be performed after Final Acceptance and after the instrument has been operating under normal flow conditions for a minimum of 1 week. Baseline parameters shall be recorded with the flowmeter full of its anticipated media with no flow at the time the baseline parameters are recorded. Submit a field report containing the baseline parameters and include in the Operations & Maintenance Manual for the magnetic flowmeters.
D. Submit a written report to the Engineer and the system integrator with the results of field testing. In the report, include span and range for the 4-20 mA output signal.
E. Training - Provide 1/2 day of instruction for four persons to be conducted at the project site with a manufacturer's representative. Notify the Engineer and Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance. Training shall include calibration, troubleshooting, and maintenance.
3.3. CERTIFICATION OF TESTING
A. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-7
B. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall be given the Owner at least two weeks in advance.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 FLOW METERS (MAGNETIC TYPE) 40 71 13-8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 40 73 00-1
40 73 00
PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, ready to operate, the following pressure measurement equipment, complete with all necessary accessories, to output analog signals as indicated herein in compliance with the following specifications and as shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. It is a requirement of this specification that the elements of the system be provided by a single supplier. This supplier shall have total responsibility for the equipment and services specified in this section, as well as all other Division 40 specifications.
B. For ease of identification, designations for the various components of the metering systems to be furnished and installed are given in Table 40 73 00-1.
TABLE 40 73 00-1
SCHEDULE OF GAUGE PRESSURE MEASURING EQUIPMENT
Service Nameplate Designation
Equipment
Designation
Operating
Range
Line Size
Location
PRV Upstream Pressure PIT-6020 0-100 psi 1” Five Star Intertie PRV
PRV Downstream Pressure PIT-6030 0-100 psi 1” Five Star Intertie PRV
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
C. Division 33 Utilities
D. Section 09 90 00 Paintings and Coatings
E. All Division 40 specifications
All electrical equipment and wiring shall be in full compliance with Division 26, Electrical Specifications.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 40 73 00-2
B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings – Submit per Design Assist Construction Agreement section 2.15
1. Training Itinerary - Indicate the sessions (i.e., Day One, Day Two, etc.), the lessons for the respective sessions, and the equipment to be used during training.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual
1. Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation, for operation and maintenance manual format and content.
C. Project Record Documents
1. Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation, for project record documents format and content.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.
B. Accept products on site in factory containers unless system is completely integrated into a pre-manufactured panel that has been factory tested. Inspect for damage.
C. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1 requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide a one-year warranty for pressure transmitters covering the entire unit including the electronics and diaphragm.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate mounting locations with the General Contractor.
B. Coordinate with plant operators after transmitters are brought on-line to verify that the transmitters are reading values consistent with normal operation.
1.9 SPARE PARTS
A. One spare gage pressure transmitter for each different range gage pressure transmitter provided.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 40 73 00-3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. All gauge pressure transmitters on this project shall be by the same manufacturer.
Where specifications deviate from the suggested manufacturer disregard the manufacturer and adhere to the specifications. Manufacturer and series shall be the following:
1. CLA-VAL Model X141-PT
2. Approved Equal
2.2 GAGE PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS
A. General Description
1. Transmitters shall be gage transmitters as indicated on Table 40 73 00-1.
Ranges shall be as required by Table 40 73 00-1.
2. Electrical Connection shall be 2 wire 4-20Ma,
3. Transmitter Supply Voltage 8-30 VDC
4. Enclosure housing = IP-67.
5. Process connection ¼” NPT Male Threaded.
6. The transmitter shall be rated to 290 psig static pressure.
7. Transmitters shall be 24 VDC, loop-powered.
8. All hardware connecting the pressure transmitter to the process shall be 316 stainless steel, including taps, fittings, valves, and piping.
9. Translate gage pressure into a 4-20 mA current linear output.
10. Transmitter shall be per IEC 61298-2.
B. Performance Requirements
1. Accuracy - ±0.5 percent of calibrated span for 4-20 mA outputs.
2. Pressure Overload = 2XMax Scale
3. Operating Temperature – -40 degrees to 80 degrees C.
4. Fluid Temperature – -40 degrees to 80 degrees C.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Nameplates – Refer to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation. The wording of the nameplate shall be as specified in Table 40 73 00-1.
B. Mounting Hardware – Provide stainless steel mounting hardware as necessary to mount equipment in locations as described in the Contract Documents.
C. Cabling – Provide manufacturer supplied 33 feet (10 M) cable for power, and signal, and conduit to locate transmitters in locations listed in Table 40 73 00 -1 and the Contract Documents according to Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
D. Lightning and Surge Protection – Provide lightning and surge protection for the Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 40 73 00-4
equipment listed in Table 40 73 00-1 in accordance with Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
E. Block and Bleed Valves – All gage pressure transmitters shall have 316 stainless steel block and bleed valves that shall serve to isolate the transmitter from the process for servicing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Verify grounding of system.
E. Verify that impulse lines are clean and free from debris.
F. Verify that that block and bleed valves and three-valve manifolds do not leak when transmitters are removed.
G. Beginning of installation means installer accepts conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
B. All electrical work performed in fabrication and installation of the transmitters shall be in full accordance with the requirements of the Division 26 specifications.
C. Mount all equipment provided herein in accordance with Section 40 61 00, Instrumentation.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform operational testing on control systems to verify proper operation and field wiring connections.
3.4 MANUFACTURER’S OR SYSTEM INTEGRATOR’S FIELD SERVICES
A. Final Acceptance – Include 1/2 day for a manufacturer-authorized service representative to test equipment to demonstrate that:
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS 40 73 00-5
1. The transmitter and block and bleed valve have been properly installed, properly calibrated, and is functioning as specified.
B. Installation – Include 1/2 day for a manufacturer-authorized service representative to verify proper mounting of the equipment, including mounting technique, mounting surface, and functional location.
C. Training – Provide two, 1/4-day sessions of instruction to be conducted at the project site with a manufacturer’s representative. Notify the Engineer and Owner in writing a minimum of two weeks in advance. Training shall include calibration, troubleshooting, and maintenance. Duration of training is actual on-site training time with the operators, travel and other time shall be separate from this training requirement. Training shall cover:
1. Use of the calibration kit via a live demonstration using the supplied calibration kit and an uninstalled, spare pressure transmitter.
2. Pressure transmitter setup, recalibration, replacement, troubleshooting, error codes, and use of the block and bleed valve.
3.5 CERTIFICATION OF TESTING
A. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all tests shall be made in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Owner. When the presence of such a representative is so waived, certified results of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor.
B. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. Written notice of all tests shall be given the Owner at least two weeks in advance.
END OF SECTION
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-1
40 96 20
CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: This Section covers control panels shown on the Electrical or Instrumentation Drawings, or as specified in either Division 26 or 40, and sets minimum standards for all packaged unit panels.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
The specifications sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers:
A. Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.15 Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other Submittals
B. Design-Assist Construction Agreement – 2.6 Labor and Materials
C. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical
D. Section 40 63 43 – Programmable Logic Controllers
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Publications:
1. ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems
2. ICS 2 Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies
3. ICS 4 Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems
4. ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Publication:
1. 508 Industrial Control Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The Control System Hardware Submittal shall be furnished in accordance with the City of Roseville specification.
B. Technical Manuals: Provide technical manuals.
1.5 CERTIFICATION
A. UL Label:
1. Each control panel and terminal cabinet shall bear the UL label except as Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-2
noted in the following paragraph. The UL label shall apply to the enclosure, the specific equipment supplied with the enclosure, and the installation and wiring of the equipment within and on the enclosure. If required for UL labeling, provide ground fault interrupters, isolation transformers, fuses, and any other necessary equipment, even though such equipment is not indicated on the Drawings. The fabricator shall be an approved UL listed manufacturer.
2. Control panel enclosures containing instruments mounted through the enclosure walls or door shall meet all requirements for UL labeling as above, but no UL label is required. This exception applies only if UL Recognized instruments for the intended purpose are not made.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Ship assembled control panels in proper packages for shipping/handling and field installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The control panels and associated control and instrumentation equipment shall be furnished as a coordinated assembly requiring only field connections of the power and control circuits for a complete and operating installation as specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide an individual compartment within the overall assembly for each of the following:
1. Electrical metering and distribution (Panel-1)
2. PLCFSV01
3. PLCFSV02
B. The panels shall be free-standing, dead-front, NEMA 4X, with pad-lockable 3- point latch.
C. Provide enclosure sun shield plates, fabricated 316 SS and installed on standoffs on the top, south side, and west side of each PLC enclosure. Fabricated plate width and height shall span the entire length of the top and/or side of the enclosure to fully protect the enclosure.
D. Sun shield color shall be coordinated with and approved by the owner. Submit the color to be used as part of the shop drawing submittal.
E. Control Panel Shelf: PLC cabinet enclosures shall be provided with retractable shelf for temporary use of laptop programming terminals on the inside of the panel door.
F. A large print pocket shall be provided on interior face of the enclosure door(s).
Where this cannot be accommodated due to windows and other control devices Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-3
mounted on the door, the print pockets shall be mounted on the interior side of the control panels.
G. The control panel controls shall be 120 VAC. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with the indicated requirements.
H. Safety Requirements: The electrical supply in each PLC compartment shall be arranged to be disconnected by a local 15 amp thermal magnetic circuit breaker.
Each control panel shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of all external conductors. The Contractor shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use.
I. Discrete outputs from the control panel shall be provided by electrically isolated contacts rated for 5 amps at 120 VAC. Analog inputs and outputs shall be isolated 4-20 mA signals with power supply.
J. Control panels shall be thoroughly cleaned and sand blasted per Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC-SP-6 (Commercial Blast) after which surfaces shall receive a prime coat Amercoat 185 or approved equal, 3-mils DFT, for a total thickness of the prime plus finish system of 6 mils. The finished color of the outside surfaces shall be selected by the Engineer, unless otherwise indicated. Interior of the control panel, back-panel, and side-panels shall have a white finish coat.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL MATERIALS
A. Outdoor control panels shall be stainless steel.
B. The following requirements apply to the front and rear face of the panel, both sides and the edges of all flanges, and the periphery of all holes or cut-outs.
1. All high spots, butts, and rough spots shall be ground smooth.
2. The surfaces shall be sanded or sandblasted to a smooth, clean bright finish.
3. All traces of oil shall be removed with a solvent.
4. The first coat of primer shall be applied immediately.
C. Structural shapes and strap steel shall comply with ASTM A 283 – Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Grade C.
1. Bolting Material: Commercial quality carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers shall be ½-inch diameter with UNC threads. Carriage bolts shall be used for attaching end plates. All other bolts shall be hex end machine bolts. All nuts shall be hot pressed hex, American Standard, heavy.
Standard wrought washers shall be used for foundation bolts and attachments to building structures. All other bolted joints shall have SAE standard lock washers.
D. Panels shall be of sufficient size to adequately enclose all instruments designated Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-4
as “panel-mounted” plus ample interior clearance to allow for installation, general servicing, and maintenance of the instruments. Elevations and horizontal spacing shall be subject to Engineer’s approval.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Duct: Wiring duct shall be manufactured of Noryl and shall be of the restricted slot design, white in color, Panduit or approved equal. Size shall be based on actual wiring requirements. All duct shall be precisely cut for a precision fit. All covers shall be readily accessible. All analog signals shall be run in separate ducts from digital signals and power.
B. Cable Ties: Cable ties shall be self-locking with stainless steel locking tables as manufactured by Thomas & Betts. Adhesive backed type mounting bases shall not be used.
C. Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be din rail mounted, 20A, and 300V. All terminals shall be complete with marking tags. Terminals shall be Phoenix Contact, Model SLKK 5, or equal.
D. Fuse Terminal Blocks: Fuse terminal blocks shall be the same profile, but different color as the feed through terminal blocks, and shall have blown fuse light indicator. Fuse terminal blocks shall be Phoenix Contact, model UK5-HESI, or equal.
E. Disconnect Terminal Blocks: Disconnect terminal blocks shall be of knife disconnect type. The blocks shall have a universal foot for mounting on DIN rail and a width of the feed through block. Disconnect terminal blocks shall be Phoenix Contact Type UK 5-MTK-P/P, or equal.
F. Wiring Methods: Wiring methods and materials for all panels shall be in accordance with the N.E.C. requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Signal and Control Circuit Wiring:
1. Wire type and sizes: Conductor shall be flexible stranded copper machine tool wire, UL listed Type MTW, and shall be rated 600-volts. Wires for instrument control circuits and alarm input circuits shall be No. 14 AWG.
All other wires, including shielded cables, shall be No. 16 AWG minimum.
2. Wire Insulation Colors: Conductors supplying 120 VAC power on the line side of a disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the ungrounded conductor. Neutral circuit conductors shall have white insulation. Equipment ground conductors shall have green insulation.
Insulation for ungrounded 120 VAC control circuit conductors shall be red. All wires energized by a voltage source external to the control panels shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for all DC conductors shall be Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-5
blue.
3. Signal Cable – Non Computer Use:
a. Signal wire shall be twisted pair or triads in conduit or troughs.
Cable shall be constructed of No. 18 AWG copper signal wires with THWN or THHN insulation.
b. Color code for instrument signal wiring shall be as follows for 24 VDC wire:
(+) 24 VDC = RED
(-) 24 VDC = GRAY
Analog signal:
POS = BLACK
NEG = CLEAR
Discrete events & low voltage control:
POS = RED or BLUE
NEG = GRAY
Ground = GREEN
c. Color code for instrument signal wiring shall be as follows for 120 VAC wire:
Power (L1) = BLACK
Neutral (L2) = WHITE
Control = VIOLET
Ground = GREEN
d. A copper drain wire shall be provided for the bundle with a wrap of aluminum polyester shield. The overall bundle jacket shall be PVC.
4. Industrial Ethernet Cable:
a. Shielded (STP) Ethernet Cable shall be used to connect PLC interfaces and radios to the Industrial Ethernet Switches.
5. Wire Marking: Wire numbers shall be marked using white numbered wire markers make from plastic-coated cloth, Brady Type B-500 or approved equal, or shall be heat-shrink plastic.
6. Flexible conduit is not acceptable except when specifically approved by the Engineer in writing.
7. Conduit fittings shall be Crouse-Hinds cast fittings or approved equal.
8. Panels shall be provided with two separate ground bars, one for power ground and one for signal ground. Provide the ground bars with tapped holes to accommodate ground connections from various devices in the panel. Provide insulator kit for signal ground bar. Connect all signal shield grounds within the panel to the signal ground bar. Suggested ground bar and insulator kit: Square D Part #PK12GT and #PKGTAB.
9. For case grounding, panel shall be provided with a ¼-inch by 1-inch copper ground bus complete with solderless connector for one No. 4 AWG bare stranded copper cable. The copper cable shall be provided by the Contractor and be connected to a system ground loop.
H. Panel Lights and Receptacles: Panels shall be internally lighted by LED lights, Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-6
provided with guards and a toggle switch located convenient to each access door.
One duplex GFI type receptacle shall be provided in each panel section. The lights and receptacles shall be wired to outgoing terminal blocks for dedicated 120 volt, 60 Hertz, single-phase supply.
I. Power Supply Wiring:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all instruments and motor controls shall operate on 115 volt, 60 Hz circuits.
2. When instruments do not come equipped with integral fuses, provide fuses as required for the protection of individual instruments against fault currents. Fuses shall be mounted on the back of the panel in a fuse holder, and each fuse shall be identified by a service name tag. Fuses shall be manufactured by Bussmann Manufacturing Division, Type KAW TRON or approved equal.
J. 24 VDC Power Supply: Panels shall be equipped with a linear 24 volt D.C. power supply for driving current loops and other D.C. powered equipment. It shall be solidly mounted, labeled and located in plain view oriented for ease of maintenance. Unit shall be sized based on 200% of load requirements of equipment actually furnished. 24 VDC power supply shall be PULS, Phoenix Contact, Allen-Bradley, or equal.
K. DIN Rail Mount Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be 115 VAC, single pole as manufactured by Allen Bradley, Series 1492-CB1, or approved equal.
L. Relay Sockets: Sockets for control relays shall be rated 5 amperes. Terminal screws shall be on the “Pressure Screw” type. Sockets shall be mounted via DIN rail and related hardware. Sockets shall be as manufactured by Square D, Type KU, or equal.
M. Control Relay: Magnetically held relays shall have one spare contact. Control relays shall have contacts rated for 10-ampere inductive load, 125 volts, with coil voltage, number of poles, and pole arrangement as indicated on the plans. Relays shall be of the indicating type. Provide Square D, Type KU, or equal.
N. Push Buttons, and Indicating Lights:
1. Type: Heavy duty, oil tight.
2. NEMA 12 rated to match panel in which mounted.
3. Push Button Contacts:
a. Provide one normally open and one normally closed contact. b. Type: Double break, silver contacts with moveable contact blade providing scrubbing action.
c. Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts but not less than 10 Amps resistive at 120 VAC/VDC continuous.
4. Indicating Lights:
a. Type: 120 VAC.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-7
b. Lamps: High visibility LED type, long life (20,000 hours minimum).
c. Indicating lights shall be push-to-test.
O. Uninterruptible Power Supplies: APC Smart-UPS Online SKU-SMT1500C.
2.4 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer all necessary spare parts of components required to maintain the system. Prior to final acceptance of work, the Contractor shall provide a spare parts listing of all necessary spare parts and quantities for review by OMUC’s Representative. The spare parts shall include, but not be limited to, the following minimum requirements:
Description Quantity
24 VDC Power Supply 1
Control Relay 2
B. The Contractor shall deliver all required spare parts upon final acceptance of the work. The spare parts shall not be used as replacement parts during the guarantee period.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation, testing, calibration, validation, startup and instruction shall be in accordance with Section 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical.
B. Install each control panel level and plumb, and secure by the favorably reviewed seismic mounting method. Doors shall swing freely and close tightly.
C. Provide a concrete pad for each field-mounted, freestanding control panel per Contract Drawings.
D. Carefully repair any damage to the structure, components, or finish to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Clean all nameplates.
E. Exercise care at all times after installation of control panels to keep out foreign matter, dust, dirt, debris, or moisture. Use protective sheet metal covers, canvas, heat lamps, etc., as needed to ensure equipment protection.
F. For all metal panels mounted on concrete walls or floors, install 1/8-inch shims, and paint the back sides and bottom of the panels with Mobil Hi-Build Bituminous Coating 35-J-10; Koppers Bitumastic Super Tank Solution; or approved equal. Film thickness shall be 10-mils minimum.
Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
April 2024 CONTROL PANELS 40 96 20-8
END OF SECTION
Notice of Exemption
To: Placer County Clerk From: City of Roseville
Recorder’s Office Development Services Dept.
2954 Richardson Drive 311 Vernon Street
Auburn, CA 95603 Roseville, CA 95678
Project Title: Five Star Intertie Improvements Project
Project Location: The Intertie improvements would be constructed within an existing intertie station, and within public right of way, located at the northwest corner of Five Star Boul evard and Stanford Ranch Rad at 6710 Stanford Ranch Road in the City of Roseville, Placer County, CA (APN: 017-123-043-000).
Project Description: The Roseville Environmental Utilities Department proposes construction of improvements as follows: The Five Star Intertie is a manually operated intertie between the City and the Placer County Water Agency (PCWA). To improve operational functionality, this project would entail installation of equipment to automate and provide remote capabilities via cellular wireless technology for monitoring and operation of the intertie via a Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system. Since the location does not have power service, a new transformer is required, which will be tied into the existing junction box. The project will also include replacement of any flow measurement instruments for automation compatibility. T he project does not include any new long-term water supply; it only allows for more efficient distribution of existing surface and ground water supplies.
Public Agency Approving Project: Roseville City Council
Agency Carrying Out Project: Roseville Environmental Utilities Department
Reason why this Project is Exempt: This project qualifies for a Class 1 Exemption as described in Section 15301 of the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) guidelines which states:
“Class 1 consists of …. minor alteration of existing public …. facilities….involving negligible or no expansion of use beyond that previously existing…. examples include but are not limited to: (b) Existing facilities of both investor and publicly -owned utilities used to provide electric power, natural gas, sewerage, or other public utility services;”
The project involves modification of existing facilities to increase water distribution system operational flexibility. The improvements do not result in expansion of use. No sensitive resources are present on the project site. Therefore the Class 1 Exemption is applicable to the proposed project.
Lead Agency Contact Person : William Montz, Roseville Environmental Utilities Department, 2005 Hilltop Circle, Roseville, CA 95747 (916) 774-5545.
Signature: Date: 5-24-2023 Jessica Lynch, Environmental Coordinator
City of Roseville
COUNCIL COMMUNICATION
CC #:
3649
File #:
0721
Title:
California Integrated Transit Project - User Agreement
Contact:
Zach Presley 916-774-5365 [email protected]
Meeting Date: 11/20/2024
Item #: 6.3.
RECOMMENDATION TO COUNCIL
Staff recommends that the City Council adopt a resolution approving the Kuba User Agreement for Roseville Transit's hardware procurement for the California Integrated Transit Project (Cal- ITP) and authorize the City Manager to execute the agreement.
BACKGROUND
Roseville is participating in a regional transit project led by the Sacramento Area Council of Governments (SACOG). The project is a part of the California Integrated Travel Project (Cal- ITP) which will provide a consistent and contactless fare payment option across all transit agencies in the Sacramento/Placer area.
On September 18, 2024, the City Council approved the funding mechanism for the contactless payment project. That item set up a subrecipient agreement in which SACOG would fund/reimburse Roseville for all capital costs for this project. This user agreement with Kuba establishes the scope of work and payment provisions for all hardware being procured with this project.
FISCAL IMPACT
Capital costs for this project have been assessed at $123,649.89 and will be funded using Transit and Intercity Rail Capital Program (TIRCP) funding that was secured in a grant submitted by SACOG.
The initial three years of operating costs for this project have been assessed at $59,535 and are being funded with Local Transportation Funds (LTF). There is no impact to the General Fund.
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW
The California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) does not apply to activities that will not result in a direct or reasonably foreseeable indirect physical change in the environment or is otherwise not considered a project as defined by CEQA Statute §21065 and CEQA State Guidelines §15060(c)(3) and §15378. Approval of this user agreement meets the above criteria and is not subject to CEQA. No additional environmental review is required.
CITY COUNCIL STRATEGIC PLAN/OVERARCHING GOALS
Goal E - Deliver exceptional city services
Goal F - Invest in well-planned infrastructure and growth
Respectfully Submitted,
Zachary Presley, Assistant Transportation Planner
Jason Shykowski, Public Works Director
_____________________________
Dominick Casey, City Manager
ATTACHMENTS:
Description
Resolution 24-395
User Agreement
RESOLUTION NO. 24-395
APPROVING A USER AGREEMENT, BY AND BETWEEN THE CITY OF ROSEVILLE AND KUBA, INC., AND AUTHORIZING THE CITY MANAGER TO EXECUTE IT ON
BEHALF OF THE CITY OF ROSEVILLE
WHEREAS, the City of Roseville is participating in a regional transit project lead by the Sacramento Area Council of Governments (SACOG); and
WHEREAS, the project is a part of the California Integrated Travel Project which will provide a consistent and contactless fare payment option across all transit agencies in the Sacramento/Placer area; and
WHEREAS, on September 18, 2024, the City Council approved the funding mechanism for the contactless payment project and set up a subrecipient agreement in which SACOG would fund/reimburse Roseville for all capital costs for this project; and
WHEREAS, a User Agreement with Kuba establishes the scope of work and payment provisions for all hardware being procured with this project; and
WHEREAS, the User Agreement has been reviewed by the City Council.
NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the Council of the City of Roseville that said User Agreement is hereby approved and the City Manager is hereby authorized to execute it on behalf of the City of Roseville.
PASSED AND ADOPTED by the Council of the City of Roseville this day of , 2024, by the following vote on roll call:
AYES COUNCILMEMBERS:
NOES COUNCILMEMBERS:
ABSENT COUNCILMEMBERS:
MAYOR
ATTEST:
City Clerk
USER AGREEMENT
1. This User Agreement is entered into between City of Roseville “Contracting Agency” and Kuba, Inc. “Contractor”. This User Agreement expressly incorporates the California Master Service Agreement (MSA) No. [5‐21‐70‐28-02] which is incorporated herein. This User Agreement contract form serves as an appropriate equivalent to the STD 213 as required by the MSA.
Contracting Agency: City of Roseville
Contractor Name: Kuba, Inc.
2. The Term of this Agreement is:
Start Date: 08/17/2024
Through End Date: 02/28/2027
3. The maximum amount of this Agreement is:
See Exhibit B for pricing.
4. Exhibits. The parties agree to comply with the terms and conditions of the following exhibits, which are by this reference made a part of this agreement.
Exhibits Title Pages
Exhibit A Scope of Works 4
Exhibit B Payment Provisions 3
[MSA 5-21-70-
28-02]
[MSA 5-21-70-28-02 is hereby incorporated by reference. The MSA is available at:
https://caleprocure.ca.gov/PSRelay/ZZ_PO.ZZ_CTR_SUP_CMP.GBL?Page=Z Z_CTR_SUP_PG&Action=U&SETID=STATE&CNTRCT_ID=5-21-70-28-02
Kuba Proposal for a Contactless Open-Loop Fare Payment Solutions dated July 7, 2023
In Witness Whereof, This Agreement has been executed by the parties hereto.
Contracting Agency Name:
___________________________________________ Date:________________________ City of Roseville
311 Vernon Street
Roseville, CA. 95678
Dominick Casey – City Manager
Contractor:
___________________________________________ Date:________________________ Kuba, Inc.
PO Box 31804
Las Vegas, NV. 89173
Brian Frank – General Manager, North America Transit
Docusign Envelope ID: 36E8F258-3DDD-474D-8D68-139132F0AE02 12/11/2024
User Agreement Scope of Work
1. Incorporate MSA by Reference
MSA 5-21-70-28-02 and its amendments are hereby incorporated by reference as if attached hereto.
2. Project Background
Seven transit operators in the region will lead the project with support from the Sacramento Area Council of Governments (SACOG). In 2022, the region was awarded funds from the Transit and Intercity Rail Capital Program, $2.18 million of which was allocated to collaboratively deploy contactless payment technology across the region’s agencies.
The seven transit providers that operate in the SACOG region, and are part of this award, include El Dorado Transit, Placer County Transit, Roseville Transit, Sacramento Regional Transit District (SacRT), South County Transit/Link (SCT), Yolo County Transportation, and Yuba-Sutter Transit. A brief description of each transit provider follows:
● El Dorado Transit was established in 1975 and has since expanded to provide public Dial-a-Ride service and four fixed-route lines for the western slope communities of the county. The operator also provides two commuter routes connecting the county with Folsom and Sacramento. Additionally, the operator jointly provides a fixed -route line with Capitol Corridor and Amtrak connecting Sacramento, El Dorado County and South Lake Tahoe. In 2018, the operator made $1.5 million from passenger fares and supported over 376,000 trips.
● Placer County Transit operates one local and five intercity f ixed routes services throughout the county. Their service also includes a commuter route connecting the county as far out as Colfax to Sacramento. The fixed-route services are supplemented by a public Dial-a-Ride service
● Roseville Transit serves the most populous city in Placer County, providing 10 local fixed-routes, six morning commuter routes to Sacramento, and seven evening commuter routes back to Roseville. These services also include Dial -a-Ride and paratransit.
● Sacramento Regional Transit District (SacRT) was established in 1973 and is the largest operator in the area, offering 80 fixed -route local and commuter bus routes throughout Sacramento and neighboring communities within the 418 square -mile service area. Further, the operator provides paratransit, Dial-a-Ride, and SmaRT Ride Microtransit services. SacRT co-operates the Causeway Connection with Yolo County Transportation, joining Davis and East Sacramento.
● South County Transit/Link (SCT) operates two inter -city fixed-routes – one in the Delta communities of the southernmost parts of Sacramento County and one Highway 99 inter -city fixed route from Lodi to Elk Grove. A commuter route is also offered, stretching from Galt to Sacramento. Within Galt, SCT also offers Dial-a-Ride services. ● Yolo County Transportation services disparate but populous cities in addition to more rural communities within the county. The operator offers 27 fixed -route local and intercity routes. Of these, four routes offer cross-county connectivity between Yolo and Sacramento in addition to the jointly operated Causeway Connection. Both microtransit and paratransit are offered in the county.
● Yuba-Sutter Transit operates six local fixed -routes, two commuter routes on SR 70 and SR 99 corridors to Sacramento, and three rural routes with deviations within ¾ miles of a rural route with an advanced reservation. Dial -a-Ride service is available across Marysville, Yuba City, Olivehurst, and Linda.
3. Transit Provider Objectives
The core objective of the project is to reinforce regional collaboration by creating a seamless payment experience across and within agencies to expand ridership. Introducing contactless payments to the existing portfolio of fare media provides riders with the convenience to pay with the credit/debit card in their pocket. Further, the region’s agencies aim to increase the on- time performance and efficiency of their transit systems through speedier boarding with riders no longer needing to search for exact change.
While the scope of work submitted to vendors aims for a regional collaboration, sections of this scope of work hereafter pertain to Roseville Transit only.
4. Fare Structure and Business Rules
Yolo County Transportation District will implement the following fare policies:
Base fares vary by mode/route but are all flat fares
o Fixed-route services cost $1.50 if local or $3.50 if commuter (and non- resident)
o Dial-a-ride costs $3.75
o Paratransit costs $2.50
Fare caps are requested at this time
o Daily caps for local and commuter services, respectively o Monthly capping for local and commuter services, respectively Local transfers are not requested at this time
Inter-agency transfers (e.g., Placer, SacRT, etc.) are requested when available Existing discounts (seniors, disability, etc.) will continue to be offered on the legacy systems.
When such capability is available to offer those discounts on the contactless payment system, Roseville Transit may request that the Category B provider integrate with the resulting Eligibility Verification system to do so.
5. On-board Technologies
Roseville Transit currently accepts cash, Roseville Transit passes, Placer County Transit passes, SacRT passes, and Connect Card taps. The fleet consists of 13 single-door Gillig buses, 15 two-door Gillig, eight ARBOC single-door cutaway buses, three Champion single- door cutaway buses.
Onboard technologies include SacRT GTFS-rt while GMV Syncromatics provides arrival times. The vendor will confirm compatibility with available technologies and connectivity networks to support the open loop system or propose solutions when needed.
6. Scope of Work for Category A (PADs)
Roseville Transit requests a single validator at the front of each vehicle. We expect the vendor to complete installation for the fleet.
PAD Unit Type PAD Units Needed
Front door units 49
Spare units 5
6.1 Determining whether any changes are needed to default service level agreements (SLAs) in the User Agreement
Roseville Transit accepts the default SLAs in the Master Service Agreement.
6.2 Determining internal responsibilities for the project Please reach out to Rich Frost to coordinate all details regarding this project.
Zach Presley
[email protected]
MSA 5-21-70-28-02
Exhibit B